This PDF describes Biophysical Setting (BpS) models in
the mapping zone labeled below. BpS descriptions are
listed alphabetically on the left-hand margin. You can
use the Adobe “find” function (ctrl+f) to locate a BpS by
numerical code or alpha string.
LANDFIRE Mapping Zones of the United States
Mapping Zone 73
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316011
Western North American Boreal Treeline
White Spruce Woodland - Boreal
This BPS is lumped with: WNA Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland (in part)
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Treeline White Spruce Woodland was split into a
boreal and sub-boreal variant for BpS modeling so that regional differences
could be represented.
Boreal Spruce Lichen Woodland may occur as a seral stage or variant of Boreal
Treeline White Spruce Woodland, Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest, or, less
commonly, in these same systems in the sub-boreal region.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tricia Wurtz
twurtz@fs.fed.us
4/8/2008
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Forest and Woodland
Dominant Species*
PIGL
PIMA
BENA
VAUL
Date
General Model Sources
LEDUM
ALVI5
SAPU15
BEPA
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This type is found in boreal AK from the south slopes of the Brooks Range to the north slopes of the
Alaska Range and west to the limit of tree growth. Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland, which is included as
a variant of a later seral stage within this type, occurs primarily in the northern and western portions of
the boreal zone.
Biophysical Site Description
Boreal White Spruce Woodland occurs primarily near the elevational and latitudinal limit of tree growth.
It occurs above Boreal White Spruce to 900m (Boggs et al. 2001) and below the subalpine shrub and
tundra systems and can be seen as the forested transition zone between boreal white spruce forest and nonforested subalpine vegetation. Depending on the topography, this system can occupy a narrow band just
below non-forested subalpine or a broad expanse across gentle slopes and benches. Soils are cold, but peatforming mosses are not common in the ground layer.
Vegetation Description
This type is dominated by Picea glauca although Picea mariana may be codominant (NatureServe 2008).
Canopy cover is generally between 10-25%. Hardwoods, if present, can include Betula papyrifera and
Populs tremuloides. The shrub layer typically features Betula nana, but other shrubs such as Vaccinium
uliginosum, Ledum groenlandicum and Salix pulchra may be common or dominant (NatureServe 2008).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 1 of 204
In some locations Alnus viridis is the dominant understory shrub (NatureServe 2008). Feathermoss may
be common in the in the ground layer (NatureServe 2008). On drier or more exposed sites, Cladina
spp.replace feathermosses as the dominant ground cover (Viereck 1979).
Disturbance Description
This information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe 2008),
which notes that fire information is lacking:
Fire return interval is in the vicinity of 100yrs shorter than for Western North American Boreal Treeline
White Spruce Woodland - Alaska Sub-boreal.
A possible scenario for post-fire succession in this type is the resprouting of low shrubs from underground
propagules followed by Picea glauca invading by seed from adjacent stands or surviving trees. Betula
papyrifera may invade the site if a seed source is available and site conditions are favorable. The typical
succession sequence for this type does not include a hardwood sere. The rate of succession depends on
severity of fire and seed source, and some sites may be shrub-dominated for long periods without spruce
invasion.
The successional relationships of the Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland included here are poorly
understood. This system has been included in this model as a variant of the late successional stage (class
C).
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This system is similar to Western North American Boreal Treeline White Spruce Woodland - Alaska Subboreal but does not include an insects and disease probability and has a more frequent MFRI.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch.
Issues/Problems
Experts at the LANDFIRE Fairbanks modeling meeting (Nov. 07) indicated the need for a late seral
woodland white spruce-lichen class that could develop after approximately 200yrs in the absence of
disturbance. This class was not included as a separate class because it was felt that LANDFIRE would not
be able to distinguish it for mapping. The woodland white spruce-lichen concept is included in class C in
the current model.
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks modeling
meeting (Nov. 07) and refined by Tricia Wurtz.
Vegetation Classes
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 2 of 204
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
10 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BENA
VAUL
LEGR
SAPU15
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-24yrs
This class is characterized by herbaceous and shrub vegetation. Shrubs resprout from underground propagules
and then Picea glauca invades by seed from adjacent stands or surviving trees. The shrub layer typically
features Betula nana, but other shrubs such as Vaccinium uliginosum, Ledum groenlandicum and Salix
pulchra may be common or dominant. In some locations Alnus viridis is the dominant understory shrub.
Feathermoss may be common in the in the ground layer. On drier or more exposed sites, Cladina spp. replace
feathermosses as the dominant ground cover (Viereck 1979). The rate of succession depends on severity of fire
and seed source, and some sites may be shrub-dominated for long periods without spruce invasion.
The main successional trajectory is to class C (white spruce woodland) but an alternate succession pathway to
class B (probability = 0.04) represents sites where hardwoods may invade the site if a seed source is available
and site conditions are favorable. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
15 %
Mid Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BEPA
POTR5
PIGL
PIMA
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Presence of hardwoods distinguishes class B
from class C.
Description
25-69yrs
This class is characterized by hardwood or white spruce-hardwood mixed forest. Betula papyrifera and/or
Populs tremuloides invade with or without spruce and gain canopy dominance over the shrubs. Forest canopy
cover is generally 10-25%. Eventually hardwoods senesce and white spruce gains canopy dominance (class
C).
Succession to class C. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 300yrs) maintains this class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 3 of 204
Class C
75 %
Late Development 1 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
PIMA
BENA
CLADI3
Cover
Height
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Low-Mid
Lower
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Absence of hardwoods distinguishes class C
from class B.
Description
25yrs+
This class is characterized by open white spruce woodland. Forest canopy cover is generally 10-25%.
Hardwoods, if previously present in the stand, lose dominance in overstory during this phase. The understory
may include various combinations of low shrubs, herbs and mosses. Lichens grow as the stand ages. This
class includes the Spruce-Lichen Woodland system on some sites. The dominant lichen genus is typically
Cladina; species include C. arbuscula, C. mitis, C. rangiferina and C. stellaris. Other lichens may include
Cetraria cucullata, C. islandica, C. nivalis, Bryoria spp., Alectoria nigricans and Alectoria ochroleuca.
Beetles affect this class but because the rate of outbreaks is uncertain and generally not severe enough to
cause a state transition, they were not included in the VDDT model. The frequency and severity of beetle
outbreaks will likely increase under a warmer climate.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 300yrs)
maintains this class.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 4 of 204
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
IV
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
150.2
333.0
0.00666
0.00300
104
0.00967
Percent of All Fires
69
31
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K., A. Garibaldi, J. Stevens, J. Grunblatt and T. Helt. 2001. Denali National Park and Preserve
Landcover mapping project. Volume 2: Landcover classes and plant associations. Alaska Natural Heritage
Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute, University of Alaska Anchorage, 707 A Street,
Anchorage, AK. 164 pp.
Foote, J.M. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after fire in the taiga of
interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR. USDA Forest Service. Pacific Northwest Research
Station. 108 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck, L.A. 1979. Characteristics of treeline plant communities in Alaska. Holarctic Ecology. 2: 228-238.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 5 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316012
Western North American Boreal Treeline
White Spruce Woodland - Alaska Sub-boreal
This BPS is lumped with: WNA Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland (in part)
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Treeline White Spruce Woodland was split into a
boreal and sub-boreal variant for BpS modeling so that regional differences
could be represented.
Boreal Spruce Lichen Woodland may occur as a seral stage or variant of Boreal
Treeline White Spruce Woodland, Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest, or, less
commonly, in these same systems in the sub-boreal region.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
Modeler 2 Kori Blankenship
Modeler 3
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
kblankenship@tnc.org
3/26/2008
Reviewer Beth Schulz
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Forest and Woodland
General Model Sources
PIGL
ALVI5
BENA
SAPU15
VAUL
LEDUM
bschulz@fs.fed.us
Reviewer
Vegetation Type
Dominant Species*
Date
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs throughout the boreal transition region of AK and west to the limit of tree growth. It
is not common in the Kenai Mountains, where mountain hemlock dominates treeline forest types, but
may be found in western Kenai highlands between Skilak and Tustemena lakes and in higher elevations
of Caribou Hills north of Homer.
Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland, which is included as a variant of a later seral stage within this type,
occurs commonly in the western and southwestern boreal transition region (Nulato Hills and Ahklun Mts).
Biophysical Site Description
This system occurs above White Spruce zone to 900m (Boggs et al. 2001) and below the subalpine shrub
and tundra systems and can be seen as the forested transition zone between boreal white spruce forest and
non-forested subalpine vegetation. Depending on the topography, this system can occupy a narrow band
just below non-forested subalpine or a broad expanse across gently slopes and benches. This system also
occurs at lower elevations at the western limit of white spruce. Soils are cold, but peat-forming mosses are
not common in the ground layer (NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
The Boreal Transition White Spruce Woodland occurs primarily near the elevational limit and the
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 6 of 204
western limit of tree growth. Forest canopy cover is dominated by white spruce and is generally between
10-25% (NatureServe 2008). Picea mariana may be codominant in the overstory. Common shrub species
include Betula nana, but other shrubs such as Vaccinium uliginosum, Ledum groenlandicum and Salix
pulchra may be common or dominant. In some locations Alnus viridis is the dominant understory shrub.
Feathermoss may be common in the in the ground layer (NatureServe 2008). On drier or more exposed
sites, Cladina spp. replace feathermosses as the dominant ground cover (Viereck 1979). Lichen species
may include Cladina arbuscula, C. mitis, C. rangiferina and C. stellaris, as well as Cetraria cucullata,
Cetraria islandica, Cetraria nivalis, Bryoria spp., Alectoria nigricans and Alectoria ochroleuca.
Disturbance Description
There is little information about the fire return interval for this type. Experts at the LANDFIRE
Anchorage workshop indicated that White Spruce Woodlands in the AK sub-boreal region burn less
frequently than those in the interior boreal region. They estimated a fire return interval of about 300yrs.
Spruce bark beetle (Dendroctonus rufipennis) infestations are a major natural disturbance affecting this
BpS. Beetle outbreaks in spruce forest occurred at an estimated return interval of every 52yrs on the Kenai
Peninsula over the past 250yrs (Berg and Scott 2006). Outbreaks that thin stands and produce a growth
release in surviving trees occur on average every 50yrs in white and Lutz spruce forests on the Kenai
Peninsula (Berg 2004). Spruce bark beetle outbreaks that produce a more substantial thinning occur at
longer intervals, with the last two severe infestations occurring in the 1870s-1880s and 1987-present (Berg
2004). The bark beetle outbreak that began in 1987 on the Kenai Peninsula has killed over 1.3 million
acres of spruce (USDA Forest Service 2002). This recent outbreak is associated with warmer than average
growing season temperatures that allowed beetles to mature in one year rather than two (Werner and
Holsten 1985, Barber et al. 2000 as cited in Werner et al. 2006). Berg (2004) and Berg and Scott (2006)
found no association between spruce bark beetle mortality and fire in the past.
When the canopy of these forests is thinned by spruce bark beetle-mortality, bluejoint grass (Calamagrostis
canadensis) may proliferate rapidly from its pre-disturbance low level network of rhizomatous roots and
may develop into a thick, seedling-excluding sod within a few years (Berg 2004). Boucher (2003) found
that rapid spread of Calamagrostis occurs primarily on sites with deep, loamy soils. Boucher and Mead
(2006) found that vegetation response varied following the recent outbreak in different geographic
locations on the Kenai Peninsula. Some areas exhibited an increase in early seral species (e.g.
Calamagrostis canadensis and Chamerion angustifolium); other areas exhibited an increase in late seral
mountain hemlock, while in other areas vegetation composition did not shift substantially (Boucher and
Mead 2006).
The following information was taken from the Ecological Systems draft description for Boreal Transition
White Spruce Woodland (NatureServe 2008), which notes that fire information is lacking:
A possible scenario for post-fire succession in this type is the resprouting of low shrubs from underground
propagules, followed by invasion of Picea glauca by seed from adjacent stands or surviving trees. Betula
papyrifera may invade the site if a seed source is available and site conditions are favorable, but the
hardwood phase only occurs on a small fraction of the landscape (may be more common in southwest
AK). The typical succession sequence for this type does not include a hardwood sere. The rate of
succession depends on severity of fire and seed source, and some sites may be shrub-dominated for long
periods without spruce invasion.
Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland is included in this model as a possible variant of the late successional
stage (class C). This is a best guess as to where this system fits, as its successional relationships are poorly
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 7 of 204
understood.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This BpS is similar to the interior Boreal Treeline White Spruce Woodland BpS but it includes an insects
and disease probability and a less frequent MFRI. Adjacent systems may include Alaska Sub-boreal White
Spruce-Hardwood Forest or Western North American Boreal Mesic Scrub Birch-Willow Shrubland Alaska Sub-boreal.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch
Issues/Problems
Very little information is available on the fire return interval for this type.
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Anchorage modeling
meeting (Dec. 07) with additional refinement by Tina Boucher and Kori Blankenship. It is similar to
Western North American Boreal Treeline White Spruce Woodland - Boreal but includes insects and
disease probability and a less frequent MFRI. Beth Schulz reviewed an initial draft of this model.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BENA
VAUL
LEGR
SAPU15
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
This class may uncommonly include tall
shrubs.
Description
0-24yrs
Post disturbance regeneration: herbaceous to low shrub. Shrubs resprout from underground propagules and
then Picea glauca invades by seed from adjacent stands or surviving trees. The shrub layer typically features
Betula nana, but other shrubs such as Vaccinium uliginosum, Ledum groenlandicum and Salix pulchra may
be common or dominant. In some locations Alnus viridis is the dominant understory shrub. Feathermoss may
be present in the in the ground layer.
The rate of succession depends on severity of fire and seed source, and some sites may be shrub-dominated for
long periods without spruce invasion. The typical succession sequence for this type does not include a
hardwood sere (class B).
Succession to class C. Replacement MFRI = 400yrs. Alternate succession (probability = 0.04) causes a
transition to class B and represents sites where Betula papyrifera may invade if a seed source is available and
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 8 of 204
site conditions are favorable.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Mid Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
BEPA
BENA
Shrub
Tree
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Presence of hardwoods distinguishes class B
from C.
Description
25-69yrs
Woodland to open hardwood or white spruce-hardwood mix. Tree saplings gain canopy dominance over
shrubs. Forest canopy cover is generally 10-25%. Betula papyrifera invades and stands may be either
hardwoods or a spruce-hardwood mix.
Succession to class C. Replacement MFRI = 400yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 1000yrs) maintains this class.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
90 %
Late Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
BENA
VAUL
CLADI3
Upper
Low-Mid
Low-Mid
Lower
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Absence of hardwoods distinguishes class C
from B.
Description
25yrs+
Open white spruce woodland. Site is dominated by mature conifers. Forest canopy cover is generally 1025%. Hardwoods, if previously present in the stand, lose dominance in overstory during this phase. The
understory may include various combinations of low shrubs, herbs and mosses. Feathermoss are often
common in the ground layer. On drier or more exposed sites, Cladina spp. replace feathermosses as the
dominant ground cover (Viereck 1979). Lichens may become more common in older stands, with some sites
developing into Spruce-Lichen Woodland. Clidina species include C. arbuscula, C. mitis, C. rangiferina, and
C. stellaris. Other lichens include Cetraria cucullata, C. islandica, C. nivalis, Bryoria spp., Alectoria
nigricans and Alectoria ochroleuca.
This class will persist in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 400yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI =
1000yrs) maintains this class. Insects and disease (probability = 0.02) will thin large overstory trees but will
not cause a state transition.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 9 of 204
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
398
1036
0.00251
0.00097
287
0.00349
Percent of All Fires
72
28
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Barber, V.A., Juday, P.A., Finney, B., 2000. Reduced growth of Alaskan white spruce in the twentieth
century from temperature induced drought stress. Nature 405: 668–673.
Berg, E. 2004. White spruce fire history on the Kenai Peninsula, Alaska, based on radiocarbon-dated soil
charcoal. Unpublished manuscript. Kenai National Wildlife Refuge, Alaska.
Berg, E.E and R.S. Anderson. 2006. Fire history of white and Lutz spruce forests on the Kenai Peninsula,
Alaska, over the last two millennia as determined from soil charcoal. Forest Ecology and Management
227(3): 275-283.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 10 of 204
Berg, E.E, J.D. Henry, C.L. Fastie, A.D. De Volder and S.M. Matsuoka. 2006. Spruce beetle outbreaks on
the Kenai Peninsula, Alaska, and Kluane National Park and Reserve, Yukon Territory: Relationship to
summer temperatures and regional differences in disturbance regimes. Forest Ecology and Management
227(3): 219-232.
Boggs, K., A. Garibaldi, J. Stevens, J. Grunblatt and T. Helt. 2001. Denali National Park and Preserve
Landcover mapping project. Volume 2: Landcover classes and plant associations. Alaska Natural Heritage
Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute, University of Alaska Anchorage, 707 A Street,
Anchorage, AK. 164 pp.
Boucher, T.V. 2003. Vegetation response to prescribed fire in the Kenai Mountains, Alaska. Research Paper
PNW-RP-554. Portland, OR: USDA Forest Service, Pacific Northwest Research Station. 59 pp.
Boucher, T.V. and B.R. Mead. 2006. Vegetation change and forest regeneration on the Kenai Peninsula,
Alaska following a spruce beetle outbreak, 1987–2000.
Forest Ecology and Management 227(3): 233-246.
Foote, J.M. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after fire in the taiga of
interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR. USDA Forest Service. Pacific Northwest Research
Station. 108 pp.
Matsuoka, S.M., E.H. Holsten, M.E. Shephard, R.A. Werner and R.E. Burnside. 2006. Spruce beetles and
forest ecosystems of south-central Alaska. Forest Ecology and Management 227(3): 193-194.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
USDA Forest Service. 2002. Revised land and resource management plan, final
environmental impact statement. Alaska Region Chugach National Forest. R10-MB-480d, May 2002.
Viereck, L.A. 1979. Characteristics of treeline plant communities in Alaska. Holarctic Ecology. 2: 228-238.
Werner, R.A. and Holsten, E.H., 1985. Effect of phloem temperature on development of spruce beetles in
Alaska. In: Safrankik, L. (Ed.), The Role of the Host in the Population Dynamics of Forest Insects. For.
Can., Pac. For. Cent. Victoria, British Columbia, pp. 155–163.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 11 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316030
Western North American Boreal White
Spruce-Hardwood Forest
This BPS is lumped with: Western North American Boreal White Spruce Forest
This BPS is split into multiple models: Boreal White Spruce Forest was lumped with this type because it was felt that
although it is a separate existing vegetation type, a separate biophysical
environment could not be described for it.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Kori Blankenship
Modeler 2 Robert Lambrecht
3/12/2008
Reviewer Tina Boucher
kblankenship@tnc.org
Robert_Lambrecht@fws Reviewer
.gov
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Reviewer
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Forest and Woodland
Dominant Species*
PIGL
PIMA
BEPA
POTR5
Date
General Model Sources
ARUV
VAVI
BENA
CHANA
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
Boreal White Spruce-Hardwood Forest occurs from the southern slopes of the Brooks Range to
southcentral AK and west to the limit of tree growth.
Biophysical Site Description
These systems occur on rolling hills, inactive terraces, and mountain side slopes up to 750m. Soils are
typically derived from glacial or other depositional processes and include moraines, drumlins, eskers,
kettle-kame, colluvium and loess deposits (NatureServe 2008). These systems commonly occur on welldrained upland terrain on west, east and south aspects, but are possible on all aspects (NatureServe 2008).
Permafrost is commonly absent.
Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland occurs most commonly on cool, well-drained sites with thin soils
(NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
Canopy cover in mature stands is dominated by Picea glauca and typically ranges from 25-70%, except in
the case of Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland, which has a more open canopy (10-25% cover). Other trees
such as Picea mariana, Betula papyrifera and Populus tremuloides may be subdominant in the overstory,
but Picea glauca contributes at least 75% of the total forest canopy in the forested type (NatureServe
2008). Mature stands are often open-canopied with a well-developed shrub layer (NatureServe 2008). The
woodland type may be dominated by Picea mariana (NatureServe 2008).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 12 of 204
Common understory shrubs include Arctostaphylos uva-ursi, Vaccinium vitis-idaea, V. uliginosum,
Betula nana, Empetrum nigrum, Ledum palustre ssp. decumbens, L. groenlandicum, Rosa acicularis and
Viburnum edule. Arctostaphylos rubra and Shepherdia canadensis are typically found on dryer sites
(Viereck et al. 1992). Common herbaceous species include Chamerion angustifolium ssp. angustifolium
and Calamagrostis canadensis. Other herbaceous species can include Equisetum sylvaticum, E. arvense,
Geocaulon lividum, Mertensia paniculata, Pyrola ssp., Linnaea borealis and Goodyera repens (Viereck et
al. 1992). Feather mosses such as Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium schreberi are common in the
ground layer of the forested type (Boggs and Sturdy 2005). In the mature woodland type, feather mosses
are less important, while lichens, primarily Cladina spp, form a very important component of the
understory (NatureServe 2008).
Disturbance Description
The disturbance regime is characterized by large crown fires with estimates of mean fire return intervals
ranging from 50-238yrs (Rowe 1972; Heinsleman 1981; Yarie 1981, 1983; Foote 1983; Duchesne and
Hawkes 2000). Except in the case of severe fires, post-fire succession tends to return to the pre-disturbance
forest type (Foote 1983). Pre-burn species colonize the site via rhizomes, root sprouts and trunk sprouts
(NatureServe 2008). A variety of herbaceous communities dominate: primarily Chamerion angustifolium
ssp. angustifolium and Calamagrostis canadensis (NatureServe 2008). Betula papyrifera, Populus
tremuloides or Picea glauca may individually invade and dominate sites, but eventually Picea glauca gains
dominance over hardwoods (NatureServe 2008). In severe fires, the organic layer is consumed killing the
underground propagules, and revegetation of the site is by seed.
A typical successional sequence progresses from herbaceous to shrub to hardwood/hardwood-spruce to
spruce (NatureServe 2008). In upland spruce stands post-burn succession occasionally skips the
hardwood/hardwood-spruce stage (class C in this model) and proceeds directly to a spruce dominated
stage (Viereck et al. 1992). The former successional scenario is typical of the Fairbanks area while the
later is more common around Yukon Charley, Noatak, NE boreal and at higher elevations (NatureServe
2008). Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland may occur as a very late successional stage of this system.
Post-fire regeneration of white spruce appears to be more successful when fires occur in mast years (Peters
et al. 2005). This interaction between fire, masting and subsequent tree regeneration could have
implications for historical stand structure and successional dynamics over time (Peters et al. 2005).
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This system may be found alongside any boreal black spruce or hardwood systems.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Recent warmer and drier conditions, along with human activities including fire suppression and some
logging practices have likely increased the current frequency and severity of spruce bark beetle outbreaks
compared with presettlement conditions.
Scale Description
This BpS occurs in a matrix with other vegetation types. Crown fires were typically large patch
occurrences.
Issues/Problems
It should be noted that there is a considerable variation across the range of this community type. This
description and the associated model attempt to capture the most common attributes of the system across
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 13 of 204
its range.
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks modeling
meeting (Nov. 07) and refined by Robert Lambrecht. Experts from this workshop indicated the potential
need for a self-replacement spruce model and another for the short-term mix of spruce and hardwood. This
model represents both concepts using a deterministic pathway to represent the more common sprucehardwood pathway and an alternate succession pathway to represent the less common spruce-spruce
pathway.
This model may need to be split into two regional variants: this model to cover most of the boreal region
and a variant with a lower fire return interval and no birch, to apply to the Copper River Basin and the
Wrangell Mountains.
Though Robert Lambrect originally lumped Western North American Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland
into this model as a late seral stage, a reviewer suggested that the Spruce Lichen Woodland would be a
better fit as a seral stage of the Boreal and Sub-boreal Treeline White Spruce Woodland and the Mesic
Black Spruce Forest models. Colleen Ryan removed the reference to the lump in this model but did not
alter the description or VDDT model. The model still includes a seral stage with lichens.
Tina Boucher reviewed a draft of this model.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CHANA2
CACA4
EQSY
EQAR
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
Post disturbance regeneration. A variety of herbaceous communities dominate; primarily Chamerion
angustifolium ssp. angustifolium and Calamagrostis canadensis. Other herbaceous species can include
Equisetum sylvaticum, E. arvense, Geocaulon lividum, Mertensia paniculata and Pyrola ssp. (Viereck et al.
1992). Shrubs and trees resprout from root stocks, but woody cover is low.
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 14 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
15 %
Early Development 2 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
ARUV
VAVI
BENA
LEPAD
Shrub
Tree
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
5-29yrs
This stage is dominated by shrubs and saplings. Common shrub species include Rosa acicularis, Viburnum
edule, Betula nana, Ledum palustre ssp. Decumbens, L. groenlandicum, Vaccinium vitis-idaea, V.
uliginosum and Empetrum nigrum. Arctostaphylos uva-ursi, Arctostaphylos rubra and Shepherdia
canadensis are typically found on dryer sites (Viereck et al. 1992). Betula papyrifera and Populus tremuloides
saplings are common on some sites.
Succession to class C. The alternate succession pathway to D (probability = 0.01) represents self-replacing
white spruce stands in areas where there is no adjacent hardwood seed source (e.g., Noatak, northeast boreal
and higher elevation). Replacement MFRI = 150yrs.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
30 %
Mid Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BEPA
POTR5
PIGL
ROAC
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Presence of hardwoods distinguishes class C
from D.
Description
30-129yrs
This is predominantly a hardwood forest although conifers may be present and mixed with the hardwoods.
Trees begin to shade out the shrub understory. The overstory dominants include Betula papyrifera and
Populus tremuloides. Picea glauca and P. mariana may be present. Common understory species include Rosa
acicularis, Viburnum edule, Arctostaphylos spp., Linnaea borealis, Chamerion angustifolium and Geocaulon
lividum.
Succession to class E. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 300yrs) maintains this class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 15 of 204
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
10 %
Mid Development 2 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
BENA
ARRU
VAVI
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Cover
Height
Min
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Absence of hardwoods distinguishes class D
from C. There are not mapping criteria to
distinguish class D from E but trees are likely
shorter and the stand likely more dense in D
than in E.
Description
30-129yrs
This class represents mid-seral, self-replacing white spruce stands in areas where there is no adjacent
hardwood seed source or geographic areas that tend to lack the hardwood component such as the Noatak, NE
boreal region and higher elevations. Picea glauca dominates the overstory but P. mariana may be present.
Succession to class E. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 300yrs) maintains this class.
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
40 %
Min
Late Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
BENA
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Absence of hardwoods distinguishes class E
from C. There are not mapping criteria to
distinguish class D from E but trees are likely
shorter and the stand likely more dense in D
than in E.
Description
130yrs+
Mature spruce forest. Hardwoods senesce. Accumulation of evergreen litter begins to change soil
characteristics.
Picea glauca dominates the overstory but P. mariana may be present. Common understory species include
Rosa acicularis, Viburnum edule, Shepherdia canadensis, Vaccinium vitis-idaea, Arctostaphylos spp.,Linnaea
borealis, Chamerion angustifolium and Geocaulon lividum.
This stage incorporates the concept of Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland where lichens, primarily Cladina
spp., are a very important component of the understory. Feather mosses are not as important as in other white
spruce systems.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 300yrs)
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 16 of 204
maintains this class.
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
IV
Replacement
Mixed
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
149.7
364.2
0.00668
0.00275
106
0.00943
Percent of All Fires
71
29
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K. and Sturdy, M. 2005. Plant associations and post-fire vegetation succession in Yukon-Charley
Rivers National Preserve. Alaska Natural Heritage Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute,
University of Alaska Anchorage. Prepared For: National Park Service, Landcover Mapping Program,
National Park Service-Alaska Support Office, Anchorage, AK 99501.
Duchesne L.C. and B.C. Hawkes. 2000. Fire in northern ecosystems. In: Brown, J.K. and J.K. Smith (eds.)
Wildland fire in ecosystems: effects of fire on flora. Gen. Tech. Rep. RMRS-GTR-42-vol 2. Ogden, UT:
USDA Forest Service, Rocky Mountain Research Station. 257 pp.
Foote, J.M. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after fire in the taiga of
interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR. USDA Forest Service. Pacific Northwest Research
Station. 108 pp.
Heinselman, M.L. 1981. Fire and succession in the conifer forests of northern North America. In: West,
D.C., H.H. Shugart, and D.B. Botkin. Forest succession: concepts and application. Springer-Verlag, New
York. Chapter 23.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Peters, V.S., S.E. Macdonald and M.R.T. Dale. 2005. The interaction between masting and fire is key to
white spruce regeneration. Ecology 86(7): 1744-1750.
Rowe, J.S. 1972. Forest Regions of Canada. Canadian Forest Service, Department of Environment. Ottawa.
Inform. Can. Catalogue #FO 47-1300.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 17 of 204
Yarie J. 1981. Forest fire cycles and life tables – a case study from interior Alaska. Can. J Forest Res.
11:554-562. Ritter, D. F. 1986. Process geomorphology. Wm. C. Brown Publishers, Dubuque, Iowa. 579 pp.
Yarie J. 1983. Forest community classification of the Porcupine River drainage, interior Alaska, and its
application to forest management. USDA Forest Service GTR PNW-154.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 18 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316041
Western North American Boreal Mesic Black
Spruce Forest - Boreal
This BPS is lumped with: WNA Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland (in part)
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest was split into a
boreal and sub-boreal variant for BpS modeling so that regional differences
could be represented.
Boreal Spruce Lichen Woodland may occur as a seral stage or variant of Boreal
Treeline White Spruce Woodland, Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest, or, less
commonly, in these same systems in the sub-boreal region.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Jill Johnstone
Date
jill.johnstone@usask.ca
Reviewer Will Putnam
wputman@tananachie
fs.org
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Forest and Woodland
Dominant Species*
PIMA
BEPA
POTR5
PIGL
3/12/2008
General Model Sources
BENA
LEDUM
SALIX
CACA4
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This type occurs throughout the boreal region of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This type is typically found on upland slopes and inactive alluvial deposits (NatureServe 2008). Soils are
well-drained, and permafrost is generally absent (NatureServe 2008). There is little to no peat
development; but there may be an organic layer derived from non-sphagnum mosses (NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
Picea mariana is the dominant overstory species, but Picea glauca may be codominant on some sites
(NatureServe 2008). Early successional stands may be dominated by Betula papyrifera or Populus
tremuloides (NatureServe 2008). Populus tremuloides replaces Betula papyrifera on drier sites (Foote
1983, Chapin et al. 2006). Common understory shrubs include Rosa acicularis, Betula nana, Ledum spp.,
V. uliginosum, Vaccinium vitis-idaea and Empetrum nigrum (NatureServe 2008). Herbaceous species
include Calamagrostis canadensis, Chamerion angustifolium (Epilobium angustifolium) and Equisetum
spp. Common mosses include Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium schreberi (NatureServe 2008).
Lichens, such as Cladina spp., may be abundant, especially in later seral stages (NatureServe 2008). Total
tree cover in mature stands typically ranges from 40-70% (NatureServe 2008).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 19 of 204
Disturbance Description
Crown fires or ground fires of enough intensity to kill overstory trees are the dominant disturbance
influencing Boreal Mesic Black Spruce. Mean fire return interval estimates for Boreal Black Spruce in
interior Alaska range from 25-130yrs (Yarie 1983, Heinselman1981, Viereck 1983, Viereck 1986).
The post-fire successional trajectory may be self-replacement, with black spruce following the early seral
herb and shrub stages; alternatively, black spruce-hardwood may follow the early seral stages before
returning to black spruce (Chapin et al. 2006). The pre-burn stand composition will influence the likely
successional trajectory with pre-burn spruce stands more likely to succeed to spruce and pre-burn
hardwood stands more likely to succeed to hardwood after the fire. If white spruce is present in the conifer
initiation, then white and black spruce can be codominant in the conifer canopy throughout the
successional stages.
Wind and insect damage affect this type, but very little research exists to help describe or model that
effect. These disturbances are also much smaller in their impacts than the dominant, stand-replacement
disturbances caused by fire.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Matrix
Issues/Problems
The probability of fire in the mixed spruce-hardwood stage (class C) relative to the spruce dominated
stages (class D and E) is unclear. It was assumed that the herb and shrub dominated stages (class A and
B) are less fire prone, and therefore have a lower fire probability, than the later seral stages. The
probability and effects of insects, disease and wind/weather events in this system are unclear and are
included in the old-growth stage (class E) of the model as a place holder.
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07) and
Anchorage (Dec. 07) modeling meetings and refined by Jill Johnstone.
Will Putnam expressed concern that the distinction between this BpS and Western North American Boreal
White Spruce-Hardwood Forest is ambiguous. They can occur on similar sites, and in many cases the
relative dominance of P. mariana vs. P. glauca is mostly a function of succession and/or disturbance
history.
Vegetation Classes
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 20 of 204
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CACA4
CHAN9
EQUIS
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
Post-disturbance, herbaceous vegetation. Common herbaceous species include Calamagrostis canadensis,
Chamerion angustifolium (Epilobium angustifolium) and Equisetum spp (NatureServe 2008).
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 250yrs.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
15 %
Early Development 2 Open
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
SALIX Upper
BENA
Upper
LEDUM Upper
ROAC
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
5-29yrs
This class is shrub dominated. Common species include willow, Betula nana, Ledum spp, Rosa acicularis,
Vaccinium uliginosum, V. vitis-idaea and Empetrum nigrum. Both hardwoods and spruce regeneration may
be present.
The successional trajectory of the shrub stage will depend on the pre-burn stand composition. If hardwoods
dominated the site before the burn, they are likely to vigorously resprout and gain dominance after the fire. If
spruce dominated the site before a burn, they are likely to regain dominance in the post-fire stand.
Succession to class C or D. One possible successional trajectory (represented by deterministic succession in
the model) would include a hardwood phase (class C). But this class can also take an alternative successional
pathway (probability = 0.02) directly to a spruce dominated phase (class D). Replacement MFRI = 250yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 21 of 204
Class C
30 %
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BEPA
POTR5
PIMA
PIGL
Cover
Height
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Presence of hardwoods distinguishes C from D
and E.
Description
30-119yrs
Mixed hardwood-spruce forest. Hardwoods and spruce overtop shrubs and gain dominance. Early in this age
class trees are at least 2.5cm DBH and 4-8m tall (Foote 1983). Populus tremuloides replaces Betula
papyrifera on drier sites (Foote 1983, Chapin et al. 2006). Spruce may occur as an understory, subdominant
and/or co-dominant component. Tree density may be < or > 60% depending on site conditions. Beneath
trees, shrubs, herbs and mosses exist. As the stage advances, spruce and moss become more important.
Succession to class E. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 250yrs) maintains this class.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
30 %
Mid Development 2 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIMA
PIGL
BENA
LEDUM
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Height
Min
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping purposes, if tree size class can't
distinguish class D and E, class D can be
considered closed and E woodland and open.
Description
30-119yrs
Mid-seral black spruce/feathermoss. Picea mariana dominates but Picea glauca may be codominant on some
sites. Spruce overtops the shrubs. Spruce canopy cover is commonly 50-70%.
Succession to class E. Replacement MFRI = 80yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 133yrs) maintains this class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 22 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
20 %
Late Development 1 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
PIMA
PIGL
BENA
LEDUM
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Cover
Height
Min
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping purposes, if tree size class can't
distinguish class D and E, class D can be
considered closed and E woodland and open.
Description
120yrs+
Open, old-growth black spruce. Picea mariana dominates but Picea glauca may be codominant on some sites.
Spruce gains dominance over hardwoods (if previously present). Tree canopy cover is generally <60% and
may be <25% (woodland) depending on site conditions. Occasional hardwoods may remain. The understory
may include various combinations of tall shrubs, low shrubs, herbs, mosses and lichens. If fire is absent for
long periods paludification may occur, resulting in an opening of the tree canopy to woodland conditions.
Black Spruce-Lichen Woodland may occur in this class.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 80yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 133yrs)
maintains this class. Insects/disease (probability = 0.001) and wind/weather/stress (probability = 0.01) can
cause a transition to class D.
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
III
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
All Fires
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
111.9
206.3
0.00893
0.00485
73
0.01379
Percent of All Fires
65
35
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Chapin, F.S., Oswood, M.W., Van Cleve, K., Viereck, L.A. and Verblya, D.L. (eds.) 2006. Alaska’s
Changing Boreal Forest. Oxford University Press, NY. 354 pp.
Heinselman, M.L. 1981. Fire and succession in the conifer forests of northern North America. In: West,
D.C., H.H. Shugart, and D.B. Botkin. Forest succession: concepts and application. Springer-Verlag, New
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 23 of 204
York. Chapter 23.
Foote, J.M. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after fire in the taiga of
interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR. USDA Forest Service. Pacific Northwest Research
Station. 108 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck, L.A. 1983. The effects of fire in black spruce ecosystems of Alaska and northern Canada. In:
Wein, Ross W.; MacLean, David A., eds. The role of fire in northern circumpolar ecosystems. New York:
John Wiley & Sons Ltd.: 201-220. Chapter 11.
Viereck, L.A. Van Cleve, K. and Dyrness, C.T. 1986 Forest Ecosystems in the Alaska Taiga. In: Van Cleve,
K., Chapin F.S. III, Flanagan, P.W. (and others), eds. Forest Ecosystems in the Alaskan taiga: a synthesis of
structure and function. New York: Springer-Verlag; 1986: 22-43.
Yarie J. 1983. Forest community classification of the Porcupine River drainage, interior Alaska, and its
application to forest management. USDA Forest Service GTR PNW-154.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 24 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316042
Western North American Boreal Mesic Black
Spruce Forest - Alaska Sub-boreal
This BPS is lumped with: WNA Boreal Spruce-Lichen Woodland (in part)
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest was split into a
boreal and sub-boreal variant for BpS modeling so that regional differences
could be represented.
Boreal Spruce Lichen Woodland may occur as a seral stage or variant of Boreal
Treeline White Spruce Woodland, Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest, or, less
commonly, in these same systems in the sub-boreal region.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Michelle Schuman
4/7/2008
michelle.schuman@ak.
usda.gov
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Forest and Woodland
Dominant Species*
PIMA
PIGL
BENA
LEDUM
Date
General Model Sources
VAUL
VAVI
EMNI
HYSP70
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs in the boreal transition region of AK, south of the Alaska Range, including the
Susitna and Matanuska Valleys and the Kenai Peninsula (NatureServe 2008).
Biophysical Site Description
This information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe 2008):
Sub-boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest occurs on well-drained to moderately well-drained sites including
old alluvial fans, abandoned floodplains and inactive terraces. Soils are gravelly and feature shallow to
moderately deep organic horizons. Permafrost is absent.
Vegetation Description
This information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe 2008):
Picea mariana and P. glauca are the dominant overstory species in an open forest canopy. Common
understory shrubs include Betula nana, Ledum spp., V. uliginosum, Vaccinium vitis-idaea and Empetrum
nigrum. Common mosses include Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium schreberi. Total tree cover
typically ranges from 40-70%.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 25 of 204
Disturbance Description
This information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe 2008):
The disturbance regime is characterized by crown fires or ground fires of enough intensity to kill overstory
trees. Mean fire return interval estimates for this type have not been defined, but estimates for similar sites
from interior Alaska range from 25-100yrs (Rowe et al. 1974, DeVolder 1999 [Kenai Lowland including
human-caused], Yarie 1983, Heinselman 1978, Heinselman 1981, Viereck 1983, Viereck 1986). It is
likely that the natural fire return interval is longer than those estimated for boreal sites due to less frequent
lightning strikes. A “best guess” for this system without human disturbance has been estimated at 170yrs
(FRCC expert’s consultation, 2004).
Succession after fire can return to black spruce or can pass through a hardwood sere before returning to
black spruce. Seasonality affects burn severity. An early season burn can kill the overstory without
affecting the ground layer, but a late-season burn can reduce the duff layer and kill the understory plants.
Calamagrostis is not a major factor in sub-boreal black spruce succession.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
In some locations, this BpS can be confused with the White Spruce BpS because black and white spruces
often mix, especially on sites with transitional moisture and thermal conditions (Murphy and Witten
2006).
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
The following information was taken from the Black Spruce Southcentral PNVG model description
(Murphy and Witten 2006):
In recent decades black spruce began encroaching into drying sphagnum bogs, creating “islands” of spruce
where spruce were not previously present (Ed Berg, personal communication, March 4, 2004). This drying
and resultant encroachment is attributed to the warming climate.
Scale Description
This Bps is typically found in large patches (NatureServe 2008).
The following information was taken from the Black Spruce Southcentral PNVG (Murphy and Witten
2006) model description:
Fires tend to be large – 50,000ha or larger. During most fire years a small number of large fires account
for most of the total area burned (Gabriel and Tande 1983). Ecologically significant fires usually occur
during the exceptional fire years and cover 200,000ha+ (Viereck 1983).
Issues/Problems
Comments
This model was based on the FRCC Guidebook PNVG model for Black Spruce Southcentral (BSSC;
Murphy and Witten 2006) and input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07)
and Anchorage (Dec. 07) modeling meetings. It was refined by Michelle Schuman. The class definitions
and age ranges were taken from experts at the Anchorage and Fairbanks meetings with input from
Michelle Schuman and the disturbance probabilities are similar to those in the BSSC model.
Vegetation Classes
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 26 of 204
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
10 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BENA
LEDUM
VAUL
VAVI
Upper
Middle
Low-Mi
Lower
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-14yrs
Moss, herbs, seedlings of trees and shrubs establish three months to three years post fire (Foote 1983). Shrubs
and saplings 1.4-7m tall typically begin capturing sites 4-5yrs post fire. The tall shrub and sapling layer is
characterized by 60-100% canopy closure. Tree saplings may include spruce, hardwoods or both. Common
understory shrubs include Betula nana, Ledum spp., Vaccinium uliginosum, V. vitis-idaea and Empetrum
nigrum. Common mosses include Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium schreberi.
Succession to class B. Alternate succession (probability = 0.011) causes a transition to class C and represents
the probability that some stands will go through a hardwood (with spruce understory) or spruce-hardwood
stage rather than following the main successional pathway to a black spruce dominated stage (class B).
Replacement MFRI = 167yrs.
Class B
10 %
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIMA
PIGL
BENA
LEDUM
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Cover
Height
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
B should be distinguished from D and E based
on tree size class but if that is not mapped, B
can be considered a dwarf tree class for
mapping.
Description
15-74yrs
Black or white spruce overtops shrubs and gains dominance. Tree density may be < or > 60% depending on
site conditions.
The alternate succession pathway to E represents an alternative to the main successional trajectory to class D.
Succession to class D. Alternate succession (probability = 0.015) causes a transition to class E and represents
the probability that some stands go directly to a closed spruce stage rather than following the main
successional pathway to an open spruce stage (class D). Mixed (MFRI = 830yrs) maintains the class.
Replacement MFRI = 450yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 27 of 204
Class C
5%
Mid Development 2 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BEPA
POTR5
PIMA
PIGL
Cover
Height
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Mid-Upper
Mid-Upper
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Presence of hardwoods distinguishes C from
B, D and E.
Description
15-74yrs
Hardwoods (with spruce in the understory) or hardwoods and spruce overtop shrubs and gain dominance.
Early in this age class trees are at least 2.5cm DBH and 4-8m tall (Foote 1983). Populus tremuloides
replaces Betula papyrifera on drier sites (Foote 1983, Chapin et al. 2006). Spruce may occur as an
understory, subdominant and/or co-dominant component. Tree density may be < or > 60% depending on site
conditions. Beneath trees shrubs, herbs and mosses exist. As the stage advances spruce and moss become
more important.
Succession to class D. Replacement MFRI = 250yrs.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
50 %
Late Development 1 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIMA
PIGL
BENA
LEDUM
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Min
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Height
Tree Size Class
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
75yrs+
This class is characterized by open spruce lichen forest or woodland. Spruce gains dominance over hardwoods
(if previously present). Tree canopy cover is <60% and maybe <25% (woodland) depending on site conditions.
Occasional hardwoods may remain. The understory may include various combinations of tall shrubs, low
shrubs, herbs, mosses and lichens. For spruce lichen woodland, the dominant lichen genus is Cladina; species
include C. arbuscula, C. mitis, C. rangiferina and C. stellaris. Other lichens include Cetraria cucullata, C.
islandica, C. nivalis, Bryoria spp., Alectoria nigricans and Alectoria ochroleuca.
If fire is absent for long periods paludification may occur.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Mixed (MFRI = 1400yrs) maintains the class. Replacement
MFRI = 200yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 28 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
25 %
Late Development 1 Closed
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
PIMA
PIGL
BENA
LEDUM
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Cover
Height
Min
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
75yrs+
This class is characterized by closed spruce forest. Site is dominated by mature black or white spruce with
>60% canopy closure although cover generally does not exceed 70%. The understory may include various
combinations of tall shrubs, low shrubs, herbs, mosses and lichens.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Mixed (MFRI = 1400yrs) causes a transition to class D.
Replacement MFRI = 200yrs. Insects and disease (probability = 0.001) and wind/weather/stress (probability =
0.001) cause a transition to class D.
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
IV
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
216.9
1430
0.00461
0.0007
188
0.00532
Percent of All Fires
87
13
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Chapin, F.S., Oswood, M.W., Van Cleve, K., Viereck, L.A. and Verblya, D.L. (eds.) 2006. Alaska’s
Changing Boreal Forest. Oxford University Press, NY. 354 pp.
De Volder, A. 1999. Fire and climate history of lowland black spruce forests, Kenai National Wildlife
Refuge, Alaska. Flagstaff, AZ. Northern Arizona University. 128 pp. MS Thesis.
Foote, J.M. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after fire in the taiga of
interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR. USDA Forest Service. Pacific Northwest Research
Station. 108 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 29 of 204
Gabriel, H.W. and G.F. Tande. 1983. A regional approach to fire history in Alaska. BLM Alaska TR-83-9.
Heinselman, M.L. 1978. Fire in wilderness ecosystems. In J.C.Hendee, G.H. Stankey & R.C. Lucas, eds.
Wilderness Management. USDA Forest Service, Misc. Pub. 1365.
Heinselman, M.L. 1981. Fire and succession in the conifer forests of northern North America. In: West,
D.C., H.H. Shugart, and D.B. Botkin. Forest succession: concepts and application. Springer-Verlag, New
York. Chapter 23.
Jorgenson, M.T. et al. 2003. An ecological land survey for Fort Richardson, Alaska. Cold Regions Research
and Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, NH, ERDC/CRREL TR-03019.
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Black Spruce Southcentral. In Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Rowe, J.S., J.L Bergsteinsson, G.A. Padbury and R. Hermesh. 1974. Fire Studies in the
Mackenzie Valley. ALUR Report 73-74-61. Arctic Land Use Research Program, Department of Indian
Affairs and Human Development, Ottawa, Canada. 123 pp.
Viereck, L.A. 1983. The effects of fire in black spruce ecosystems of Alaska and northern Canada. In:
Wein, Ross W.; MacLean, David A., eds. The role of fire in northern circumpolar ecosystems. New York:
John Wiley & Sons Ltd.: 201-220. Chapter 11.
Viereck, L.A. Van Cleve, K. and Dyrness, C.T. 1986 Forest Ecosystems in the Alaska Taiga. In: Van Cleve,
K., Chapin F.S. III, Flanagan, P.W. (and others), eds. Forest Ecosystems in the Alaskan taiga: a synthesis of
structure and function. New York: Springer-Verlag; 1986: 22-43.
Yarie J. 1983. Forest community classification of the Porcupine River drainage, interior Alaska, and its
application to forest management. USDA Forest Service GTR PNW-154.
Yarie J. 1981. Forest fire cycles and life tables – a case study from interior Alaska. Can. J Forest Res.
11:554-562.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 30 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316050
Western North American Boreal Mesic BirchAspen Forest
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Michelle Schuman
Modeler 3 Kori Blankenship
Reviewer Will Putnam
Forest and Woodland
General Model Sources
VIED
SHCA
ALNUS
LEDUM
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
wputman@tananachie
fs.org
Reviewer
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
BEPA
POTR5
POBA2
ROAC
4/16/2008
michelle.schuman@ak.
usda.gov
mitch.michaud@ak.usd
a.gov
kblankenship@tnc.org
Modeler 2 Mitch Michaud
Dominant Species*
Date
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
Found throughout boreal AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This system occurs on rolling hills and mountain sideslopes on west, east, and south aspects up to 750m
(NatureServe 2008). Soils are well-drained and develop on residual material or retransported deposits
including glacial till, loess, and colluvium (NatureServe 2008). Hardwood-dominated sites often persist
on slopes that are warmer and drier than white spruce or mixed white spruce hardwood sites, with aspen
dominating the driest, warmest sites (Viereck et al. 1992, Chapin et al. 2006).
Vegetation Description
Canopy cover is dominated by Betula papyrifera or Populus tremuloides and typically ranges from 2590%. P. balsamifera may be a common associate. Stands are often closed-canopied with an open shrub or
herbaceous understory. Common understory species include Alnus spp., Ledum spp., Vaccinium vitisidaea, Betula nana, Rosa acicularis, Viburnum edule and Equisetum spp. (NatureServe 2008). Shepherdia
canadensis is common on drier sites, especially well-drained riparian gravel bars. Feathermosses such as
Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium schreberi are common in the ground layer (Jorgenson et al. 1999;
Boggs and Sturdy, 2005).
Disturbance Description
Little research exists on the fire ecology of this type. The system often acts as a fire break. It is estimated
that the MFRI is longer than that of white and black spruce sites and maybe comparable to Boreal White
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 31 of 204
Spruce-Hardwood Forest system.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This system can be easily confused with seral stages of two other ecological systems in boreal AK:
Western North American Boreal White Spruce-Hardwood Forest and Western North American Boreal
White Spruce Forest. Adjacent systems include Boreal White Spruce-Hardwood, Boreal White Spruce
Forest or Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Recent ongoing leaf miner activity has been observed in birch and aspen, but no long-term information on
its impact is available.
Scale Description
Large patch
Issues/Problems
There is uncertainty about whether Boreal Mesic Birch-Aspen Forest is a separate BpS from Boreal White
Spruce-Hardwood Forest and Boreal White Spruce Forest. This system may occur only where spruce seed
sources are lacking.
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks modeling
meeting (Nov. 07) and refined by Michelle Schuman, Mitch Michaud and Kori Blankenship with input
from Tina Boucher. Boreal Mesic Birch-Aspen Forest is treated as a separate BpS within the boreal region
because experts felt it could be distinguished as occupying different biophysical settings from the Boreal
White Spruce Forest and Boreal White Spruce - Hardwood Forest systems. In contrast, the Boreal Mesic
Birch-Aspen Forest system was lumped with the Sub-boreal White Spruce-Hardwood Forest system within
the sub-boreal region because experts there felt that they could not distinguish the biophysical settings that
these types occur on.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CHAN9
CACA4
EQUIS
MEPA
Upper
Herbaceous
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
Herbaceous species dominate, including Chamerion angustifolium ssp angustifolium, Calamagrostis
canadensis, Equisetum sylvaticum, E. arvense, Mertensia paniculata and Geocaulon lividum. Shrubs are
present but not dominant. Following fire, aspen resprouts and birch appears to invade by seed (Viereck and
Schandelmeier 1980)
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 32 of 204
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 200yrs.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 2 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
ROAC
VIED
LEDUM
ALNUS
Shrub
Tree
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
4-14yrs
Shrubs gain dominance over the herbs. Hardwood seedlings are present. Common shrubs include Alnus spp.,
Ledum spp., Vaccinium vitis-idaea, Betula nana, Rosa acicularis, Shepherdia canadensis and Viburnum
edule.
Succession to class C. Replacement MFRI = 200yrs.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
15 %
Mid Development 1 Closed
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BEPA
POTR5
ROAC
VIED
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping purposes if classes C and D can't
be distinguished based on structural
characteristics, split them based on height (C
= trees <3m; D = trees >3m).
Description
15-49yrs
Hardwoods gain dominance over shrubs. This class is characterized by dense stands of sapling and pole
sized trees. Betula papyrifera or Populus tremuloides typically dominate but P. balsamifera may be a
common associate. Common understory species include Alnus spp., Ledum spp., Vaccinium vitis-idaea,
Betula nana, Rosa acicularis, Shepherdia canadensis, and Viburnum edule. This stage tends to be more
flammable than the others (personal communication, Joan Foote).
Succession to class D. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 33 of 204
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
15 %
Mid Development 2 Closed
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BEPA
POTR5
ROAC
VIED
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Cover
Height
Min
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
50-99yrs
This stand is characterized by mature hardwood trees with more dead and downed fuel. Betula papyrifera or
Populus tremuloides typically dominate but P. balsamifera may be a common associate. Common understory
species include Ledum spp., Vaccinium vitis-idaea, Betula nana, Rosa acicularis, Shepherdia canadensis and
Viburnum edule. Feathermosses such as Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium schreberi are common in the
ground layer (Boggs and Sturdy 2005).
Succession to class E. Replacement MFRI = 200yrs.
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
60 %
Min
Late Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BEPA
POTR5
ALNUS
LEDUM
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
100yrs+
Late seral stands are characterized by large hardwood trees. This class captures the old, open birch
calamagrostis stands. A mixed-age stand can develop as aspen clones resprout when individual trees die.
Betula papyrifera or Populus tremuloides typically dominate but P. balsamifera may be a common associate.
Spruce may be present in the canopy, and in the absence of fire, could potentially occupy the site. Common
understory species include Alnus spp., Ledum spp., Vaccinium vitis-idaea, Betula nana, Rosa acicularis,
Shepherdia canadensis and Viburnum edule. Feathermosses such as Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium
schreberi are common in the ground layer (Boggs and Sturdy 2005).
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 200yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 300yrs)
maintains this class.
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 34 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
IV
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
190.7
503.5
0.00524
0.00199
138
0.00724
Percent of All Fires
72
27
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K. and Sturdy, M. 2005. Plant associations and post-fire vegetation succession in Yukon-Charley
Rivers National Preserve. Alaska Natural Heritage Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute,
University of Alaska Anchorage. Prepared For: National Park Service, Landcover Mapping Program,
National Park Service-Alaska Support Office, Anchorage, AK 99501.
Chapin, F.S., Oswood, M.W., Van Cleve, K., Viereck, L.A. and Verblya, D.L. (eds.) 2006. Alaska’s
Changing Boreal Forest. Oxford University Press, NY. 354 pp.
Jorgenson, M.T., J.E. Roth, M. Raynolds, M.D. Smith, W. Lentz, A. Zusi-Cobb, and C.H. Racine. 1999. An
ecological land survey for Fort Wainwright, Alaska. U.S. Army Cold Regions Research and Engineering
Laboratory, Hanover, NH. U.S. Army Cold Regions Research Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, NH
CRREL Report 99-9. 83 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck, L.A. and L.A. Schandelmeier. 1980. Effects of fire in Alaska and adjacent Canada: a literature
review. USDI BLM. GLM-Alaska Technical Report 6. Alaska State Office. Anchorage, AK.
Viereck, L.A., Dyrness, C.T., Batten, A.R. and Wenzlick, K.J. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification.
Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286.
278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 35 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316061
Western North American Boreal Dry AspenSteppe Bluff - Lower Elevations
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Dry Aspen-Steppe Bluff was split into a lower
elevation and a higher elevation model. The lower elevation model occur below
treeline and trees are present. The higher elevation model generally occurs above
treeline although sparse aspen (<10% cover) may be present.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Mitch Michaud
Modeler 2 Michelle Schuman
3/8/2008
mitch.michaud@ak.usd
a.gov
michelle.schuman@ak.
usda.gov
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Forest and Woodland
Dominant Species*
POTR5
PIGL
ROAC
JUCO6
Date
General Model Sources
ARAL5
CAPU
PSSP6
ARFR4
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This type is found in AK from the southern slopes of the Brooks Range to southcentral AK and west to
the limit of tree growth (NatureServe 2008).
Biophysical Site Description
This system occurs commonly on moderately steep to very steep, dry, south-facing slopes and on windswept bluffs above major rivers (NatureServe 2008). Soils are typically well-drained to excessively welldrained and develop on glacial, loess, or fluvial deposits or residual material (NatureServe 2008). Soils
are often unstable and rocky outcrops are common (NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
Disturbance Description
Fire and insects are the dominant disturbance factors influencing this vegetation type.
White Spruce (Picea glauca), which can be present in later seral stages, tends to take longer to regenerate
after fire than aspen which quickly resprouts. As a result, fire tends to favor aspen but spruce will
eventually come back in (Viereck et al. 1992).
In the VDDT model the replacement fire probability is the same in all classes for lack of evidence to
suggest otherwise.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 36 of 204
Large aspen tortrix (Choristoneura conflictana) is an aspen defoliator which can have a severe effect on
mature and overmature aspen stands. Although aspen tortrix would have been present under the reference
condition, its presence and affect have increased in fire suppressed areas today. Other disturbance agents
include aspen leaf miners (Phyllocinistis populiella) and ground rot.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch
Issues/Problems
Need more information on the fire return intervals for this type.
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07) and
Anchorage modeling meetings (Dec. 08) and refined by Mitch Michaud and Michelle Schuman.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CAPU
PSSP6
ARFR4
JUCO6
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Herbs or shrubs can dominate this class.
Description
0-2yrs
This stage is characterized by dry herbaceous and low shrub vegetation coming in after a major disturbance.
Common shrub species include Vaccinium vitis-idaea, Rosa acicularis, Shepherdia canadensis and Chamerion
angustifolium (Boggs and Sturdy, 2005). Very dry sites on bluffs typically have steppe vegetation including
Juniperus communis, Arctostaphylos uva-ursi, Artemisia frigida, A. alaskana, Calamagrostis purpurascens,
Pseudoroegneria spicata (= Agropyron spicatum), Festuca altaica and Poa spp (Viereck et al. 1992, Chapin et
al. 2006 p.89).
This stage was modeled with a duration of two years. This represents a typical post-fire scenario where aspen
quickly resprout and overtop the shrubs in 1-2yrs. It is possible that this stage may last much longer. For
example, some sites severely affected by the tortrix moth (Choristoneura conflictana) can become heavily
dominated by Calamagrostis canadensis which can impede aspen regeneration, possibly for up to 10yrs, and
increase the ability of the site to carry fire.
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 100yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 37 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
15 %
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
POTR5
ROAC
JUCO6
ARAL5
Shrub
Tree
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Mid-Upper
Mid-Upper
Mid-Upper
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
3-9yrs
This stage is characterized by suckering Populus tremuloides and low shrubs. Populus tremuloides tends to
overtop the shrub and herbaceous vegetation. The shrubs and herbaceous species listed in class A are still
present.
For mapping purposes this class was defined as a state where trees are less than three meters tall. The age
range at which Populus tremuloids exceeds three meters in height varies based on site conditions and can
often happen in less than 10yrs. Heavy ungulate browsing will delay growth.
Succession to class C. Replacement MFRI = 100yrs.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
70 %
Late Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
POTR5
ROAC
JUCO6
ARAL5
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, class C can be distinguished
from class D by the absence of spruce in the
upper-layer.
Description
10yrs+
This stage is characterized by mature and eventually over-mature Populus tremuloides. Populus tremuloides
dominates the site but Picea glauca may be present in the mid or understory. The shrubs and herbaceous
species listed in class A may still be present.
Experts who provided input at the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07) and Anchorage modeling meetings
(Dec. 08) described a mature and an over-mature aspen sere. Both concepts are incorporated into this stage
because it was felt that LANDFIRE mapping teams would not be able to distinguish them as separate units.
This class can persist in the absence of disturbance or follow an alternate succession pathway to class D
(probability = 0.004) which represents sites where Picea glauca is present in the overstory. Replacement
MFRI = 100yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 200yrs) maintains this class. Insects/disease (probability = 0.0125)
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 38 of 204
cause a transition to class A.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
10 %
Late Development 2 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
POTR5
PIGL
ROAC
JUCO6
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Min
Max
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Height
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, class D can be distinguished
from class C by the presence of spruce in the
upper-layer.
Description
60yrs+
This stage is characterized by mature Populus tremuloides mixed with Picea glauca. Populus tremuloides
typically decline between 60 and 100yrs of age allowing spruce to become more dominant on some sites
(Viereck et al. 1992). Aspen are generally even aged initiating from a disturbance event while spruce tend to
be uneven aged and come into the stand gradually over time (Viereck et al.1992). Canopy cover can range
from woodland to closed but stands tend to open up overtime. The shrubs and herbaceous species listed in
class A may still be present.
This class can persist in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 100yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 200yrs)
maintains this class. Insects/disease (probability = 0.0125) cause a transition to class A.
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 39 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
III
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
100.2
241.1
0.00998
0.00415
71
0.01414
Percent of All Fires
71
29
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K. and Sturdy, M. 2005. Plant associations and post-fire vegetation succession in Yukon-Charley
Rivers National Preserve. Alaska Natural Heritage Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute,
University of Alaska Anchorage. Prepared For: National Park Service, Landcover Mapping Program,
National Park Service-Alaska Support Office, Anchorage, AK 99501.
Chapin, F. S., Oswood, M. W., Van Cleve, K., Viereck, L. A., Verblya, D. L. (eds.) 2006. Alaska’s
Changing Boreal Forest. Oxford University Press, NY. 354 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 40 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316062
Western North American Boreal Dry AspenSteppe Bluff - Higher Elevations
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Dry Aspen-Steppe Bluff was split into a lower
elevation and a higher elevation model. The lower elevation model occur below
treeline and trees are present. The higher elevation model generally occurs above
treeline although sparse aspen (<10% cover) may be present.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
Modeler 2 Colleen Ryan
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
4/24/2008
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Upland Shrubland
Dominant Species*
ARFR4
ARAL5
PSSP6
JUCO6
Date
General Model Sources
ARUV
BRINA
CAPU
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs at high elevations throughout the boreal and sub-boreal regions of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This low open shrub system occurs in the alpine or subalpine on steep south-facing, wind-swept bluffs
and ridges. It may be associated with river systems above treeline. The substrate is steep, unstable, dry
mineral soil. Rocky outcrops are common.
Vegetation Description
The vegetation cover in this system is typically open and discontinuous with much exposed mineral soil.
Artemisia species are the primary characteristic dominants, but this system supports a unique assemblage
of species including Artemisia frigida, Artemisia alaskana, Juniperus communis, Arctostaphylos uva-ursi,
Pseudoroegneria spicata (= Agropyron spicatum), Bromus pumpellianus, Calamagrostis purpurascens,
Festuca altaica and Poa spp. (Chapin et al. 2006). Populus tremuloides may be present, but canopy cover
is <10% (NatureServe 2008).
Disturbance Description
The fire regime for this system is expected to be similar to that of the adjacent Western North American
Boreal Dry Aspen-Steppe Bluff - Lower Elevations. However, this system has less fuel, which would tend
to produce fewer and patchier fires. For this model, the FRI for replacement fires was estimated at 140yrs
(vs. 100yrs for Boreal Dry Aspen and Steppe Bluff).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 41 of 204
Because this system is often found on unstable slopes with dry mineral soils, shifting slopes are an
ongoing disturbance. Grazing is probably an important factor in shaping this system, as this is important
Dall sheep habitat. Neither grazing nor erosion was included as disturbances in the model because these
are long-term, ongoing phenomena.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This system is similar to Western North American Boreal Dry Aspen-Steppe Bluff - Lower Elevations, but
lacks aspen and rose as dominant species. This system occurs above treeline and may be adjacent to
Western North American Boreal Dry Aspen-Steppe Bluff - Lower Elevations, which includes a mosaic of
aspen and steppe vegetation.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Linear; small patch
Issues/Problems
Comments
Fire frequencies in this model were adapted from the Western North American Boreal Dry Aspen-Steppe
Bluff - Lower Elevations model created by Mitch Michaud and Michelle Schuman.
Suggested reviewers for this system include: Carl Roland and Dalia Vargis-Kretzinger for information on
grazing.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PSSP6
BRINA
CAPU
feal
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Typically herb-dominated, but herb cover may
be sparse, and sprouting shrubs may be
present.
Description
0-4yrs
Post-disturbance dry herbaceous or sparse shrubs. Grasses typically dominate the site. Shrubs may sprout from
rootstock. Herbaceous cover tends to be open or sparse. In some cases, grasses may be absent and the ground
will be bare until shrubs resprout. Pseudoroegneria spicata (= Agropyron spicatum), Bromus pumpellianus,
Calamagrostis purpurascens and Festuca spp. are typical species. Artemisia frigida and Artemisia alaskana are
typically regenerating in the understory.
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 140yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 42 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
95 %
Late Development 1 Open
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
ARFR4
ARAL5
PSSP6
BRINA
Shrub
Tree
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Pole 5-9" DBH
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Five years plus
Dry, low, open shrubs. Mature shrubs. Shrubs become dominant, but an herbaceous layer usually persists.
Shrub cover is 25-75%. Artemisia frigida and Artemisia alaskana dominate. Common grasses include
Pseudoroegneria spicata (= Agropyron spicatum), Bromus pumpellianus and Calamagrostis purpurascens.
Populus tremuloides may be present, but canopy cover is <10%.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 140yrs. Mixed (MFRI = 200yrs)
maintains this class.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 43 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
III
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
143.2
206.6
0.00698
0.00484
85
0.01183
Percent of All Fires
59
41
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Batten, A.R., Murray, D.F. and Dawe, J.C. 1979. Threatened and Endangered Plants in selected areas of the
BLM Fortymile Planning Unit.. File Report for Contract No. YA-512-CT8-162. USDI BLM AK State
Office 701 C Street, Anchorage, AK 99513. 127 pp.
Boggs, K. and Sturdy, M. 2005. Plant associations and post-fire vegetation succession in Yukon-Charley
Rivers National Preserve. Alaska Natural Heritage Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute,
University of Alaska Anchorage. Prepared For: National Park Service, Landcover Mapping Program,
National Park Service-Alaska Support Office, Anchorage, AK 99501.
Chapin, F.S., Oswood, M.W., Van Cleve, K., Viereck, L.A. and Verblya, D.L. (eds.) 2006. Alaska’s
Changing Boreal Forest. Oxford University Press, NY. 354 pp.
Hanson, H.C. 1951. Characteristics of some grassland, marsh, and other plant communities in western
Alaska. Ecol. Monogr. 21 (4): 317-378.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 44 of 204
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 45 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316070
Western North American Boreal Subalpine
Balsam Poplar-Aspen Woodland
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Mitch Michaud
Modeler 2 Michelle Schuman
3/27/2008
mitch.michaud@ak.usd
a.gov
michelle.schuman@ak.
usda.gov
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Forest and Woodland
Dominant Species*
POBA2
POTR5
VIED
ROAC
Date
General Model Sources
ARCTO3
SALIX
CACA4
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs commonly throughout the mountain ranges of southcentral AK and also near the
northern and western limit of the boreal region (NatureServe 2008). It occurs beyond the coniferous
treeline in western and northern AK (NatureServe 2008).
Biophysical Site Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
Western North American Boreal Subalpine Balsam Poplar-Aspen Woodland occurs on well-drained
upland terrain on southerly aspects on upper slopes to treeline. In the upper elevation range of this
system, it can occur in the subalpine zone above the coniferous treeline. Soils are generally well-drained,
shallow, and develop on colluvial deposits, glacial till or bedrock.
Vegetation Description
Populus balsamifera ssp. balsamifera and/or P. tremuloides are the dominant overstory species. Trees are
often stunted on exposed sties (Jorgenson et al. 2003). Plots from Denali National Park showed an
average tree height of 2.4m for Dwarf Poplar Aspen Forest (Clark and Duffy 2006). Common understory
shrubs include Viburnum edule, Rosa acicularis, Arctostaphylos spp. and Salix spp. A wide variety of
herbaceous species may occur including Calamagrostis canadensis, Pyrola spp. and Aconitum
delphinifolium (Viereck 1979, Jorgenson et al. 2003).
Disturbance Description
The disturbance dynamics of these high elevation forests are unclear but wind/exposure and fire could be
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 46 of 204
driving disturbance process. Balsam poplar and quaking aspen are fire adapted. Balsam poplar may be top
killed by moderate intensity fires but can root sprout within several weeks following fire (Harris 1990).
Aspen is also easily top killed by fire but fire stimulates vigorous root sprouting (Howard 1996).
The probability of fire in the VDDT model is a best guess based on the assumption that this type would
have a fire return interval similar to that of tundra types.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch or small patch
Issues/Problems
This model was defined at the Fairbanks workshop as having an additional early seral stage dominated by
alpine tundra shrubs, herbaceous vegetation or bare ground. This class was described as a persistent state
occurring on sites frequently disturbed by avalanches or other weather events (snow, ice, wind, etc). It
was later determined that this stage could not be adequately modeled with the two tree dominated stages
(class A and B in the current model) and that it was probably best to represent the non-forested sites as a
different BpS.
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07) and
Anchorage modeling meetings (Dec. 08) and refined by Mitch Michaud and Michelle Schuman.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
25 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
POBA2
POTR5
VIED
ROAC
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Height
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Tree Size Class
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-49yrs
This class is characterized by young stands of balsam poplar and/or aspen. Trees come in immediately via
suckering in the post-disturbance stand along with the shrubs and herbaceous species. Wind desiccation can
delay the development of trees.
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 200yrs resets age to zero. Wind/weather/stress (probability =
0.0067) maintains this class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 47 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
75 %
Late Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
POBA2
POTR5
VIED
ROAC
Shrub
Tree
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping purposes, if tree size class or
image texture can't be used to distinguish class
A and B, split them on height (A = trees <3m;
B = trees >3m).
Description
50yrs+
This class is characterized by mature balsam poplar and/or aspen. Mature stands can be more open than early
seral stands (class A) but not always. Hardwoods begin to senesce after about 150yrs and a mixed age stand
develops.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance although it becomes even aged as hardwoods senesce. Mixed
fire (MFRI = 150yrs) causes a transition to class A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 48 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
III
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
715
205
0.0014
0.00488
159
0.00629
Percent of All Fires
22
78
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Clark, M.H. and M.S. Duffy. 2006.Soil Survey of Denali National Park, Alaska. USDA NRCS. Available
online at: http://soildatamart.nrcs.usda.gov/Manuscripts/AK651/0/DenaliPark.pdf.
Harris, Holly T. 1990. Populus balsamifera subsp. balsamifera. In: Fire Effects Information System,
[Online]. USDA Forest Service, Rocky Mountain Research Station, Fire Sciences Laboratory (Producer).
Available: http://www.fs.fed.us/database/feis/ [2008, March 27].
Howard, Janet L. 1996. Populus tremuloides. In: Fire Effects Information System, [Online]. USDA Forest
Service, Rocky Mountain Research Station, Fire Sciences Laboratory (Producer). Available:
http://www.fs.fed.us/database/feis/ [2008, March 27].
Jorgenson, M.T. et al. 2003. An ecological land survey for Fort Richardson, Alaska. Cold Regions Research
and Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, New Hampshire, ERDC/CRREL TR-03019.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck, L.A. 1979. Characteristics of treeline plant communities in Alaska. Holarctic Ecology. 2: 228-238.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 49 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316080
Alaska Sub-boreal Avalanche Slope
Shrubland
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Kori Blankenship
kblankenship@tnc.org
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
Upland Shrubland
ALVIS
SARA2
SALIX
CACA4
4/15/2008
Reviewer Tina Boucher
Reviewer
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Dominant Species*
Date
General Model Sources
CHAN9
ATFI
DREX2
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system is found on steep mountain slopes in the sub-boreal region and less frequently in the boreal
region of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
Avalanche slopes occur where mountain slopes are steep enough to produce frequent snow slides
preventing forest development. Upper avalanche slopes typically have a slope angle of at least 70% but
the lower slopes and run-out zones may be much less steep. Soils are shallow and stony, underlain by
colluvium, glacial till and residuum (NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
The dominant shrub species is typically Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata; but other shrubs including Sambucus
racemosa, Salix spp. and Spirea stevenii may be common (NatureServe 2008). Herbaceous patches are
often dominated by Calamagrostis canadensis and Chamerion angustifolium; other common herbs
include Athyrium filix-femina, Dryopteris expansa and Veratrum viride (Viereck et al. 1992). Tree
seedlings and saplings may be common on some slopes but do not emerge as an overstory due to frequent
snow avalanches (NatureServe 2008).
Disturbance Description
Avalanche slopes can extend from the alpine into the montane and lower toe slopes; this model, however,
applies only to avalanche slopes occurring below treeline. Snow avalanche is the dominant disturbance,
but rocks, soil, and debris can also be transported in the slide. This system represents a topoedaphic
climax (Viereck et al. 1992). Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata has a growth form that tolerates avalanche
disturbance and can maintain dominance on the site (NatureServe 2008). Frequent snow slides prevent
tree seedlings and saplings from reaching the upper canopy (NatureServe 2008). Fire is minimal and is
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 50 of 204
expressed only around the edges of this type as fires are introduced from neighboring types.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This system is similar in species composition to Alaska Sub-Boreal Mesic Subalpine Alder Shrubland, but
it occurs below the subalpine zone and tree growth is limited by avalanche frequency rather than elevation
as in the subalpine system (NatureServe 2008). Adjacent forest systems may include Alaska Sub-boreal
Mountain Hemlock-White Spruce Forest, Alaska Sub-boreal Mountain Hemlock Forest or Alaska Subboreal White Spruce-Hardwood Forest.
Though avalanche slopes can occur from alpine to lower slopes, this model excludes the avalanche slopes
above treeline—these would be included in other systems according to vegetation type: Alaska Sub-Boreal
Mesic Subalpine Alder Shrubland, Western North American Boreal Alpine Dwarf-Shrubland, Alaska Subboreal and Maritime Alpine Mesic Herbaceous Meadow, etc.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Small to large patch
Issues/Problems
No information is available on the MFRI for this type. The MFRI was estimated to be the same as the
Alaska Sub-Boreal Mesic Subalpine Alder Shrubland BpS.
Comments
This model was developed by Kori Blankenship using the class age ranges from the Persistent Shrub
North PNVG model (Murphy and Witten 2006) and a similar MFRI to the Alaska Sub-Boreal Mesic
Subalpine Alder Shrubland BpS.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
70 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CACA4
CHAN9
ATFI
DREX2
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Height
Tree Size Class
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
Forbs, shrubs and deciduous trees resprout immediately following disturbance, but herbaceous vegetation
dominates in early succession. Herbaceous patches are often dominated by Calamagrostis canadensis and
Chamerion angustifolium; other common herbs include Athyrium filix-femina, Dryopteris expansa and
Veratrum viride (Viereck et al. 1992).
Succession to class B. Avalanche (probability = 0.25) resets the age of this class. Replacement MFRI = 900yrs.
Mixed MFRI = 5000yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 51 of 204
Late Development 1 All Structures
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Class B
30 %
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
ALVIS
SALIX
SARA2
SPST3
Shrub
Tree
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Five years plus
Shrubs can become established at the edges or the bottom of the chutes. The dominant shrub species is
typically Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata; but other shrubs including Sambucus racemosa, Salix spp. and Spiraea
stevenii may be common. Tree seedlings and saplings may be common on some slopes but typically do not
emerge as an overstory due to frequent snow avalanche. On sites where avalanche activity is less frequent
trees can occasionally emerge temporarily in the overstory.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Avalanche (probability = 0.25) resets the age of this class.
Replacement MFRI = 900yrs. Mixed MFRI = 5000yrs.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 52 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
909.1
5000
0.0011
0.0002
769
0.00131
Percent of All Fires
84
15
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) Avalanche
Other (optional 2)
References
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Persistent Shrub North. In Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 53 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316090
Alaska Sub-Boreal Mesic Subalpine Alder
Shrubland
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Kori Blankenship
kblankenship@tnc.org
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
Upland Shrubland
ALVIS
SALIX
SARA2
SPST3
4/11/2008
Reviewer Tina Boucher
Reviewer
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Dominant Species*
Date
General Model Sources
CACA4
CHAN9
ATFI
DREX2
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
Alaska Sub-boreal Mesic Subalpine Alder Shrubland is widespread on upper mountain slopes above
treeline throughout the boreal transition region of AK (Viereck 1979). A riparian shrub variant of this
system is found throughout the boreal and sub-boreal regions of AK in subalpine through alpine valleys.
Biophysical Site Description
These systems occur on well-drained mesic sites in the subalpine zone and in constrained riparian
corridors on slopes in the alpine and subalpine. Seasonal overbank flooding may occur in the riparian
areas, but generally it does not result in shifting channels or gravel bar formation (NatureServe 2008).
Soils are shallow, stony and well-drained, underlain by colluvium, glacial till and residuum (NatureServe
2008).
Vegetation Description
This system often appears as a band of alder above treeline and below the alpine systems. Alnus viridis
ssp. sinuata is the dominant shrub species, but other shrubs including Salix spp. (sometimes the dominant
shrub), Sambucus racemosa and Spiraea stevenii may be common (NatureServe 2008). Herbaceous
patches often occur within the shrub zone and may be dominated by Calamagrostis canadensis and
Chamerion angustifolium; other common herbs include Athyrium filix-femina, Dryopteris expansa,
Veratrum viride, Valeriana sitchensis, Lupinus nootkatensis and Sanguisorba sitchensis (Viereck et al.
1992).
Disturbance Description
This system represents a topoedaphic climax (Viereck et al. 1992). It occurs above treeline and is not
controlled by avalanche activity, although avalanches may occur. Alder will resprout following fire but no
studies exist on fire effects in this type. The fire return interval is likely long, possibly 500-1000yrs. Early
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 54 of 204
season fire prior to green-up would be more likely to carry than late season fire. Alder is also affected by
insects and diseases (NatureServe 2008).
Flooding and herbivory may be important disturbances, especially for the Alpine Riparian system
(NatureServe 2008).
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This system is similar in species composition to Alaska Sub-boreal Avalanche Slope Shrubland, but it
occurs in the subalpine zone and tree growth is limited by elevation not avalanche frequency (NatureServe
2008). Pacific Maritime Tall Shrubland occupies a similar landscape position along the Gulf Coast of AK,
but this system may be dominated by Rubus spectabilis, which does not occur in boreal regions. In the
boreal transition region, the alder zone is intermixed with mesic herbaceous meadows (Calamagrosits
canadensis and Chamerion angustifolium) (NatureServe 2008).
This system includes riparian shrub types in the alpine and subalpine zones.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
This system may have been expanding further into the alpine in recent decades (NatureServe 2008).
Scale Description
Large patch
Issues/Problems
In the absence of data on MFRI for this system, the MFRI was estimated to be slightly lower than that in
the FRCC Guidebook Persistent Shrub North model.
Other major disturbances, including flooding, avalanches and herbivory, are not included in the model
because it is believed that shrubs would resprout immediately following these disturbances.
Comments
This model was based on the FRCC Guidebook PNVG model for Persistent Shrub North (Murphy and
Witten 2006). The MFRI was increased based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE
Anchorage (Dec. 07) modeling meeting. Tina Boucher reviewed an initial draft of this model and
recommended eliminating mixed fire and decreasing the MFRI for Replacement Fire slightly so that the
AllFire MFRI is slightly lower than that for Persistent Shrub North (these suggestions are reflected in the
current draft of the model).
Vegetation Classes
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 55 of 204
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CACA4
CHAN9
ATFI
DREX2
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
Grasses, sedges and/or forbs dominate the site. Shrubs sprout from rootstock. Herbaceous patches often occur
within the shrub zone and may be dominated by Calamagrostis canadensis and Chamerion angustifolium;
other common herbs include Athyrium filix-femina, Dryopteris expansa, and Veratrum viride, Valeriana
sitchensis, Lupinus nootkatensis and Sanguisorba sitchensis (Viereck et al. 1992).
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 2000yrs.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
95 %
Mid Development 1 Closed
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
ALVIS
SALIX
SARA2
SPST3
Shrub
Tree
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
None
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Five years plus
Shrubs overtop herbaceous layer and become dominant. A low shrub and/or herbaceous layer usually persists.
Shrub cover is 25-75%. Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata is the dominant shrub species, but other shrubs including
Salix spp. (sometimes the dominant shrub), Sambucus racemosa and Spiraea stevenii may be common.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 830yrs.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 56 of 204
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
833
0.00120
832
0.00122
Percent of All Fires
98
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
DeVelice, R.L., Hubbard, C.J., Boggs, K., Boudreau, S., Potkin, M., Boucher, T. Wertheim, C. 1999. Plant
community types of the Chugach National Forest. Tech. Publ. R10-TP-76. Juneau, AK: USDA Forest
Service, Alaska Region. 375 pp.
Jorgenson, M.T. et al. 2003. An ecological land survey for Fort Richardson, Alaska. Cold Regions Research
and Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, New Hampshire, ERDC/CRREL TR-03019.
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Persistent Shrub North. In Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 57 of 204
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Talbot, S.S, Talbot, S.L. and Daniels, F.J.A. 2005. Comparative phytosociological investigation of
subalpine alder thickets in southwestern Alaska and the North Pacific. Phytocoenologia. 35(4): 727-759.
Viereck, L.A. 1979. Characteristics of treeline plant communities in Alaska. Holarctic Ecology. 2: 228-238.
Viereck, L.A., Dyrness, C.T. Batten, A.R. and Wenzlick, K.J. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification.
Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286.
278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 58 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316101
Western North American Boreal Mesic Scrub
Birch-Willow Shrubland - Boreal
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models: Boreal Mesic Scrub Birch-Willow Shrubland was split into Boreal Mesic Scrub
Birch-Willow Shrubland - Boreal and Boreal Mesic Scrub Birch-Willow
Shrubland - Sub-boreal for BpS modeling so that a longer fire return interval
could be applied to the sub-boreal variant.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Jennifer Allen
4/4/2008
Jennifer_Allen@nps.go
v
Reviewer Lisa Saperstein
Lisa_Saperstein@fws.
gov
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Upland Shrubland
Dominant Species*
BENA
VAUL
LEPAD
SAPU15
Date
General Model Sources
SABA3
EMNIN
VAVI
HYSP70
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system is found in the boreal region from low elevations to the subalpine zone.
Biophysical Site Description
This system occurs on well-drained sites often in the subalpine. It is found on mesic sites on mid to upper
slopes, above tree line and on terraces and sideslopes. Soils are mineral with a well-decomposed organic
layer of 5-30cm thick (Viereck et al. 1992, NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
Betula nana (this species now includes B. glandulosa) usually dominates the shrub layer, but Vaccinium
uliginosum, Ledum decumbens (Ledum palustre L. ssp. Decumbens), Salix pulchra, S. barclayi, S. glauca
or other Salix spp. may also be common or occasionally dominant (Viereck 1979, Viereck et al. 1992,
NatureServe 2008). Dwarf shrubs such as Empetrum nigrum and Vaccinium vitis-idaea may be common
under the low shrub layer. Herbaceous species are sparse, but may include Festuca altaica, Hierochloe
alpina, Calamagrostis canadensis and Chamerion angustifolium. Feathermoss (Hylocomium splendens
and Pleurozium schreberi) and lichens are common, but peat-forming mosses and sedges are not common
(Viereck et al. 1992, NatureServe 2008).
Disturbance Description
This system represents a topoedaphic climax in some areas, in other cases it may be seral to shrub-tussock
over long time periods (Viereck et al. 1992).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 59 of 204
There is little information available about the fire history of shrub communities in AK. Birch and
ericaceous shrub tundra tends to produce more severe burns than sedge-shrub tussock tundra (Racine
1979). After fire, shrubs resprout readily from underground propagules if they have not been burned, and a
shrub community re-establishes on the site within five years. After severe fires that remove the organic
layer and burn the propagules, herbaceous species that establish by seed may dominate the site for more
than five years. Burned-over spruce woodlands near treeline may be converted to low shrub after fire
(Pegau 1972) and may slowly regenerate a spruce overstory. The fire return interval is longer in the subboreal region than in boreal AK. Adjacent vegetation influences the fire frequency. If the adjacent
vegetation is flammable, then the low shrub type will have a more frequent fire return. Fire return
intervals are long, likely greater than 100yrs. Trees may also invade these shrublands but over long time
frames (NatureServe 2008).
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
At treeline, this system occurs above the Boreal Treeline White Spruce Woodland - Boreal (NatureServe
2008).
Sites dominated by non-riparian or wetland Salix spp. are included in this type (NatureServe 2008). Low
shrub types on peat deposits are included in the wetland types (NatureServe 2008).
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch
Issues/Problems
The probability for fire in the VDDT model is a best guess, not based on literature.
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07)
modeling meeting and refined by Jennifer Allen.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
FEAL
HIAL3
CACA4
CHAN9
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Cover
Height
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
After fire, herbaceous species such as Festuca altaica and Hierochloe alpina may dominate, especially at
higher altitudes. Calamagrostis canadensis and Chamerion angustifolium are common. Low shrubs can
resprout following fire, quickly regaining dominance of a site. This class may persist for more than five years
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 60 of 204
if fire severity is high enough to remove the organic layer.
Succession to class B. Replacement fire (MFRI = 200yrs) resets age to zero.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
95 %
Late Development 1 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BENA
VAUL
LEPAD
SALIX
Shrub
Tree
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
None
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Five years plus
This class is dominated by shrubs, often Betula nana. Vaccinium uliginosum, Ledum decumbens, Salix
pulchra, S. barclayi, S. glauca or other Salix spp. may also be common (Viereck 1979, Viereck et al. 1992).
Dwarf shrubs such as Empetrum nigrum and Vaccinium vitis-idaea may be common under the low shrub
layer. Some sites may include very low cover of trees, especially black spruce.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 200yrs causes a transition to A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 61 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
IV
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
200
0.005
200
0.00502
Percent of All Fires
100
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Anderson, J.H. 1974. Plants, Soils, Phytocenology and Primary Production of the Eagle Summit Tundra
Biome Site. US Tundra Biome Data Report 74-42. Ecosystem Analysis Studies, US International Biological
Program, US Arctic Research Program. 142 pp.
Batten, A.R. 1977. The vascular floristics, major vegetation units, and phytogeography of the Lake Peters
area, northeastern Alaska. M.S. thesis. University of Alaska, Fairbanks, AK. 330 pp.
Batten, A.R., Murray, D.F.and Dawe, J.C. 1979. Threatened and Endangered Plants in selected areas of the
BLM Fortymile Planning Unit.. File Report for Contract No. YA-512-CT8-162. USDI BLM AK State
Office 701 C street, Anchorage, AK 99513. 127 pp.
Hanson, H.C. 1951. Characteristics of some grassland, marsh, and other plant communities in western
Alaska. Ecol. Monogr. 21 (4): 317-378.
Hanson, H.C. 1953. Vegetation types in northwestern Alaska and comparisons with communities in other
arctic regions. Ecology 34(1): 111-140.
Hettinger, L.R. and A.J. Janz. 1974. Vegetation and soils of northeastern Alaska. Arct. Gas Biol. Rep. Ser.
21, 206 pp. North. Eng. Serv., Co., Ltd., Edmonton, Can.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 62 of 204
Hulten, E. 1966. Contributions to the knowledge of flora and vegetation of the southwestern Alaskan
mainland. Sven. Bot. Tidskr. 60(1): 175-189.
Jorgenson, M.T. 1984. The response of vegetation to landscape evolution on glacial till near Toolik Lake,
Alaska. Pages 134-142 in Inventorying forest and other vegetation of the high latitude and high altitude
regions: Proceedings of an International Symposium, Society of American Foresters Regional Technical
Conference. Fairbanks, AK. Society of American Foresters, Bethesda, MD.
Kessel, B., and G.B. Schaller. 1960. Birds of the upper Sheenjek Valley, northeastern Alaska. Biol. Pap. 4:
59 pp. Univ. Alaska, Fairbanks.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Pegau, R.E. 1968. Reindeer range appraisal in Alaska. M.S. thesis. University of Alaska, Fairbanks, AK.
130 pp.
Pegau, R.E. 1972. Caribou investigations-analysis of range. In: Pegau, R.E. and J.E. Hemming (ed.).
Caribou report. Volume 12. Progress report. Federal Aid in Wildlife Restoration, Projects W-17-2 and W17-3, Job 3.3R. Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game, Juneau, AK: 1-216.
Racine. 1979. Climate of the Chucki-Imuruk area. Pages 32-37 in H. R. Melchior, ed., Biological Survey of
the Bering Land Bridge National Monument. Alaska Cooperative Park Studies Unit, University of Alaska
Fairbanks, Fairbanks, AK.
Steigers, W.D. Jr., D. Helm and J.G. MacCracken. 1983. Alaska Power Authority, Susitna Hydroelectric
Project, environmental studies- subtask 7.12: 1982 plant ecology studies. Final Report. University of
Alaska, Agricultural Experiment Station, Palmer, AK. 288 pp.
Viereck, L.A. 1962. Range survey: sheep and goat investigations. [Place of publication
unknown]: [Publisher unknown]; completion report, W-6-R-3, Alaska work plan E, Job 2-A. 21 pp.
Viereck, L.A. 1963. Sheep investigations: survey of range ecology. Project W-6-R-4, Work plan E. Job 2-A.
Alaska Department of Fish and Game, Juneau, AK.
Viereck, L.A. 1979. Characteristics of treeline plant communities in Alaska. Holarctic Ecology. 2: 228-238.
Viereck, L.A., and Little, E.L. 1972. Alaska Trees and Shrubs. USDA Forest Service Ag. Handbook 410.
University of Alaska Press, Fairbanks, Alaska. 265 pp.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
Webber, P.J., Komarkova, V., Walker, D.A. and E. Werbe. 1978. Vegetation mapping and response to
disturbance along the Yukon River-Prudhoe Bay Haul Road. In: Brown, J. (principal investigator).
Ecological baseline investigations along the Yukon River-Prudhoe Bay Haul Road, Alaska. Hanover, NH:
Corps of Engineers, U.S. Army Cold Region Research and Engineering Laboratory: 25-87.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 63 of 204
Young, S.B. and Racine, C.H. 1978. Ecosystems of the proposed Katmai western extension, Bristol Bay
lowlands, Alaska. Final Rep. Contributions from the Center for Northern Studies 15. Wolcott, VT: Center
for Northern Studies. 94 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 64 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316102
Western North American Boreal Mesic Scrub
Birch-Willow Shrubland - Alaska Sub-boreal
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Mesic Scrub Birch-Willow Shrubland was split
into boreal and sub-boreal variants for BpS modeling so that a longer fire return
interval could be applied to the sub-boreal variant.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Kori Blankenship
Modeler 2 Tina Boucher
Modeler 3
kblankenship@tnc.org
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Reviewer
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Upland Shrubland
BENA
VAUL
LEPAD
SAPU15
4/24/2008
Reviewer
Vegetation Type
Dominant Species*
Date
General Model Sources
SABA3
EMNIN
VAVI
HYSP70
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system is found in the sub-boreal region from low elevations to the subalpine zone. This system is
more common in the northern portion of the sub-boreal region (e.g., northern Cook Inlet); the tall shrub
system dominated by Alnus viridis spp. sinuata replaces it in the southern portion of the region.
Biophysical Site Description
This system occurs on well-drained sites often in the subalpine. It is found on mesic sites on mid to upper
slopes, above tree line and on terraces and sideslopes. Soils are mineral with a well-decomposed organic
layer of 5-30cm thick (Viereck et al. 1992, NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
Betula nana (this species now includes B. glandulosa) usually dominates the shrub layer; Vaccinium
uliginosum, Ledum decumbens (Ledum palustre L. ssp. Decumbens), Salix pulchra, S. barclayi or other
Salix spp. may also be common or occasionally dominant (Viereck 1979, Viereck et al. 1992,
NatureServe 2008). Dwarf shrubs such as Empetrum nigrum and Vaccinium vitis-idaea may be common
under the low shrub layer. Herbaceous species are sparse, but may include Festuca altaica and Hierochloe
alpina. Feathermoss (Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium schreberi) and lichens are common, but
peat-forming mosses and sedges are not common (Viereck et al. 1992, NatureServe 2008).
Disturbance Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
This system represents a topoedaphic climax in some areas, in other cases it may be seral to shrub-tussock
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 65 of 204
over long time periods (Viereck et al. 1992).
There is little information available about the fire history of shrub communities in AK. Birch and
ericaceous shrub tundra tends to produce more severe burns than sedge-shrub tussock tundra (Racine
1979). After fire, shrubs resprout readily from underground propagules if they have not been burned, and a
shrub community re-establishes on the site within five years. After severe fires that remove the organic
layer and burn the propagules, herbaceous species that establish by seed may dominate the site for more
than five years. Burned-over spruce woodlands near treeline may be converted to low shrub after fire
(Pegau 1972) and may slowly regenerate a spruce overstory. The fire return interval is longer in the subboreal region than in boreal AK. Adjacent vegetation influences the fire frequency. If the adjacent
vegetation is flammable, then the low shrub type will have a more frequent fire return. Fire return
intervals are long, likely greater than 100yrs. Trees may also invade these shrublands but over long time
frames.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
At treeline, this system occurs above the Western North American Boreal Treeline White Spruce
Woodland - Alaska Sub-boreal (NatureServe 2008).
Sites dominated by non riparian or wetland Salix spp. are included in this type (NatureServe 2008). Low
shrub types on peat deposits are included in the wetland types (NatureServe 2008).
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch
Issues/Problems
The probability for fire in the VDDT model is a best guess, not based on literature.
Comments
This model was based on the Western North American Boreal Mesic Scrub Birch-Willow Shrubland Boreal model created by Jennifer Allen. Kori Blankenship and Tina Boucher increased the MFRI for the
sub-boreal variant of the model and made minor edits to the description.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
FEAL
HIAL3
Upper
Upper
Cover
Height
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
After fire, herbaceous species such as Festuca altaica and Hierochloe alpina typically dominate. This class may
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 66 of 204
persist for more than five years if fire severity is high enough to remove the organic layer.
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 300yrs resets age to zero.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
95 %
Late Development 1 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BENA
VAUL
LEPAD
SALIX
Shrub
Tree
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
None
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Five years plus
This class is dominated by shrubs, often Betula nana. Betula glandulosa, Vaccinium uliginosum, Ledum
decumbens, Salix pulchra, S. barclayi or other Salix spp. may also be common (Viereck 1979, Viereck et al.
1992). Dwarf shrubs such as Empetrum nigrum and Vaccinium vitis-idaea may be common under the low
shrub layer. Trees may invade the shrubland over long time frames.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 300yrs cause a transition to A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 67 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
300
0.00333
300
0.00335
Percent of All Fires
99
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Hulten, E. 1966. Contributions to the knowledge of flora and vegetation of the southwestern Alaskan
mainland. Sven. Bot. Tidskr. 60(1): 175-189.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Pegau, R.E. 1972. Caribou investigations-analysis of range. In: Pegau, R.E. and J.E. Hemming (ed.).
Caribou report. Volume 12. Progress report. Federal Aid in Wildlife Restoration, Projects W-17-2 and W17-3, Job 3.3R. Alaska Dept. of Fish and Game, Juneau, AK: 1-216.
Racine. 1979. Climate of the Chucki-Imuruk area. Pages 32-37 in H. R. Melchior, ed., Biological Survey of
the Bering Land Bridge National Monument. Alaska Cooperative Park Studies Unit, University of Alaska
Fairbanks, Fairbanks, AK.
Viereck, L.A. 1963. Sheep investigations: survey of range ecology. Project W-6-R-4, Work plan E. Job 2-A.
Alaska Department of Fish and Game, Juneau, AK.
Viereck, L.A. 1979. Characteristics of treeline plant communities in Alaska. Holarctic Ecology. 2: 228-238.
Viereck, L.A., and Little, E.L. 1972. Alaska Trees and Shrubs. USDA Forest Service Ag. Handbook 410.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 68 of 204
University of Alaska Press, Fairbanks, Alaska. 265 pp.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 69 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316110
Western North American Sub-boreal Mesic
Bluejoint Meadow
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
Modeler 2 Colleen Ryan
Modeler 3
Upland Grassland/Herbaceous
Dominant Species*
4/25/2008
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Vegetation Type
General Model Sources
CACA4
CHANA
HEMA80
ATFI
Date
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Map Zone
73
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs throughout the boreal and boreal transition regions of AK, though it appears to be less
common north of the Alaska Range (NatureServe 2008).
Biophysical Site Description
Soils are typically fine-textured mineral and may be poorly drained (on flats) to well drained (on
sideslopes). In the Sub-boreal region, mesic Calamagrostis canadensis meadows often occur near treeline
interspersed with subalpine tall shrub (NatureServe 2008). Its elevational limit is just above the limit of
tall shrub (within 100m). This system may also occur as a small patch in drained lake beds within the
boreal region.
Vegetation Description
Calamagrostis canadensis is the species that characterizes this system, though other grasses, forbs and
ferns may codominate. Fern- and forb-dominated patches commonly occur in a matrix of bluejoint
meadow. Mosses are uncommon, but patchy feathermosses may be present in more open stands. Lichens
and woody plants are absent or scarce, though this system is often found in a mosaic with tall shrub
(especially alder) communities (Viereck et al. 1992).
The vegetation is usually dense, with canopy height of 0.8-1.4m, occasionally reaching two meters
(Viereck et al. 1992). Species composition ranges from nearly pure stands of Calamagrostis canadensis to
mixtures of C. canadensis with forbs, ferns and other grasses, including Heracleum maximum, Angelica
lucida, Chamerion angustifolium, Athyrium filix-femina, Dryopteris expansa, Equisetum arvense and
Veratrum viride (Viereck et al 1992).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 70 of 204
Disturbance Description
Though Mesic Bluejoint Meadows often occur on disturbed sites, the Sub-boreal Mesic Bluejoint Meadow
system, as described here, is stable over long periods. The fire regime is likely to be similar to that of the
alder tall shrub vegetation typically found just downslope from this system. However, the Sub-boreal Mesic
Bluejoint Meadow system is extremely flammable in early summer prior to green-up. Fires in this time
period generally do not burn the duff layer, since the ground is usually still wet or frozen). For this model,
overall MFRI was estimated at approximately 800yrs.
Avalanches are possible but are unlikely to affect the vegetation.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Mesic Bluejoint Meadow vegetation may also appear as a seral stage in a variety of other systems
following fire or other disturbance. This system includes meadows that are long-term landscape features.
This system is typically found just downslope from the Alaska Sub-boreal and Maritime Alpine Mesic
Herbaceous Meadow or Alpine Dwarf-Shrubland system and upslope or interspersed with Alaska SubBoreal Mesic Subalpine Alder Shrubland. In some cases this system may be found directly adjacent to
treeline.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch
Issues/Problems
In the absence of data, the fire regime for this system was assumed to be similar to that of the Alaska SubBoreal Mesic Subalpine Alder Shrubland system often found adjacent to this system.
Comments
The fire regime for this system was based on the Alaska Sub-Boreal Mesic Subalpine Alder Shrubland
model by Kori Blankenship.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
100 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CACA4
CHANA2
HEMA80
ATFI
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Height
Tree Size Class
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
This class represents the stable Mesic Bluejoint Meadow system. Calamagrostis canadensis and other grasses,
forbs and/or ferns dominate the site.
Replacement MFRI = 1000yrs. Mixed MFRI = 5000yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 71 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Shrub
Tree
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 72 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
909.1
5000
0.0011
0.0002
769
0.00131
Percent of All Fires
84
15
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
DeVelice, R.L., Hubbard, C.J., Boggs, K. et al. 1999. Plant community types of the Chugach National
Forest. Tech. Publ. R10-TP-76. Juneau, AK: USDA Forest Service, Alaska Region. 375 pp.
Jorgenson, M.T. et al. 2003. An ecological land survey for Fort Richardson, Alaska. Cold Regions Research
and Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, New Hampshire, ERDC/CRREL TR-03019.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 73 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316120
Western North American Boreal Dry
Grassland
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
Modeler 2 Colleen Ryan
Modeler 3
Upland Grassland/Herbaceous
Dominant Species*
General Model Sources
BRINA
ARFR4
ARAL5
4/25/2008
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Vegetation Type
FEAL
FERU2
CAPU
PSSP6
Date
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Map Zone
73
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
Western North American Boreal Dry Grassland occurs across the boreal and sub-boreal regions of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This system typically occurs on dry sideslopes or bluffs. Soils are well drained to excessively drained, and
permafrost is absent. Some slopes may have steep, unstable soil (NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
These sites are typically dominated by grasses, though forbs and shrubs may be common, but shrub cover
is <25%. Common species include Festuca altaica, F. rubra, Calamagrostis purpurescens, Elymus
inovatus, Artemisia frigida, Artemisia alaskana, Pseudoroegneria spicata, Bromus pumpellianus, Poa spp.
and Achillea spp.( NatureServe 2008).
Disturbance Description
The fire regime for this system is expected to be similar to that of the adjacent Western North American
Boreal Dry Aspen-Steppe Bluff - Higher Elevations.
Because this system is often found on loose, dry mineral soils on unstable slopes, shifting slopes are an
ongoing disturbance. Grazing is probably an important factor in shaping this system, as this is important
Dall sheep habitat. Grazing and erosion were not included as disturbances in the model because these are
long-term, ongoing phenomena.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Adjacent systems may include Western North American Boreal Dry Aspen-Steppe Bluff - Higher
Elevations or Western North American Boreal Dry Aspen-Steppe Bluff - Lower Elevations. This system
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 74 of 204
does not encompass the coastal Leymus-forb meadows that occur in Aleutians, southwest, southcentral and
southeast Alaska (NatureServe 2008).
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Small to large patch.
Issues/Problems
Comments
Fire intervals in this model were adapted from the Boreal Subalpine Steppe Bluff model, also by Boucher
and Ryan.
Suggested reviewers for this system include Carl Roland and Dalia Vargis-Kretzinger for information on
grazing.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
100 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
FEAL
FERU2
CAPU
BRINA
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
This class represents the stable dry grassland community. Grasses, sedges and/or forbs dominate the site.
Replacement MFRI = 200yrs. Mixed MFRI = 1000yrs.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 75 of 204
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
III
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Fire Intervals
Replacement
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
143.0
200.6
0.00699
0.00499
83
0.01199
Percent of All Fires
58
42
Surface
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 76 of 204
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 77 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316141
Western North American Boreal Montane
Floodplain Forest and Shrubland - Boreal
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Montane Floodplain Forest and Shrubland was
split into a boreal and sub-boreal variant for BpS modeling so that regional
differences could be represented.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Michelle Schuman
Modeler 2 Karen Murphy
Modeler 3 Evie Witten
Map Zone
73
Forest and Woodland
Dominant Species*
4/7/2008
michelle.schuman@ak. Reviewer Tom Paragi
usda.gov
karen_a_murphy@fws.g Reviewer
ov
Reviewer
ewitten@tnc.org
Vegetation Type
POBAB2
PIGL
ALNUS
SALIX
Date
General Model Sources
SHCA
ROAC
VIED
EQUIS
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
tom.paragi@alaska.go
v
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This type occurs on floodplains throughout the boreal region of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
The substrate is typically well-drained sand or cobble, although finer silts and clays can be found on
higher terraces, in ponds, on distal floodplains, and in lower energy systems. Permafrost is usually absent.
Oxbows and other wet depressions commonly form on the floodplains, and these sites commonly develop
into wetlands.
Vegetation Description
Primary succession on floodplains begins when new alluvial surfaces are colonized by tree, shrub and
herbaceous species. Common early seral woody species include Populus balsamifera (seedlings), Picea
glauca (seedlings), Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Alnus incana ssp. tenuifolia, Salix barclayi and Salix
alaxensis (Boggs 2000, Scott 1974, Shephard 1995, Thilenius 1990, Viereck 1966). Common early seral
herbaceous species may include Lupinus spp., Hedysarum spp. and Equisetum spp. (NatureServe 2008).
The next seral stage includes communities dominated by Populus balsamifera and/or Picea glauca with an
understory of Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Salix spp. and bryophytes. On dry sites the shrub layer may be
dominated by Shepherdia canadensis, Dryas octopetala, D. integrifolia and fruticose lichens
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 78 of 204
(Steroucaulon spp.) (NatureServe 2008). The tall shrub component of the early successional stages
diminishes rapidly, probably because of decreased light from the dense tree overstory. Populus
balsamifera does not regenerate in the understory and consequently, Picea glauca gains dominance in the
overstory within 150yrs (NatureServe 2008). Rosa acicularis and Viburnum edule are common understory
shrubs on older surfaces.
Disturbance Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
Flooding is the primary disturbance in this system. Flooding can be caused by snowmelt, precipitation, ice
jams and glacial runoff. Different rivers or portions of rivers may be more prone to certain types of
flooding. Frequent flooding and channel migration create a pattern of gravel bars and early successional
stages across the valley bottom. Sediment deposition raises the surface of the floodplain over time. As the
terrace becomes farther removed from the channel, flooding becomes less frequent. Water availability on
terraces plays a major role in community structure and composition. Water inputs are from overbank flow
(flooding), ground water and precipitation. Deposits with high permeability become progressively drier as
they are vertically and horizontally removed from the active channels.
Vegetation succession on gravel bars can be represented by the following seral stages: barren or
herbaceous, willow or willow-alder, alder, poplar or spruce poplar, spruce. Oxbows and other wet
depressions commonly form on the floodplains, and develop into wetlands. Succession and species
composition is, however, variable due to diverse environmental conditions such as water depth, substrate
and nutrient input.
The following information was taken from the Riparian Spruce Hardwood Potential Natural Vegetation
Group (PNVG) model (Murphy and Witten 2006):
Estimates of mean fire return intervals include:
-200yrs+ (200-300yr range) (Viereck 1973, Barney 1971)
-300yrs (Rowe et al 1974) (for alluvial white spruce MacKenzie River Valley)
-300yrs (Heinselman 1981)
-300yrs (Duchesne and Hawkes 2000)
-300yrs (personal communication experts’ workshop March 2004)
Small, relatively infrequent, mixed severity fires characterize this PNVG due to the sites’ proximity to
rivers, which act as fire breaks (Viereck 1973, Barney 1971, Foote 1983). High moisture content of the
vegetation, high percentage of deciduous species, and high relative humidity also contribute to making
fires less frequent in the Riparian Spruce Hardwood PNVG than in typically adjacent PNVGs. In interior
AK the oldest white spruce stands (350yrs+) are commonly found on islands of floodplains where they are
protected from fire (Viereck 1973).
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This model applies to forest and shrub systems in the active and inactive portions of the floodplain, but not
abandoned floodplains. Oxbows and other wet depressions commonly form on the floodplains. Floodplain
Wetlands are a separate ecological system and a separate BpS.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Linear.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 79 of 204
Issues/Problems
Wetlands that occur on the floodplain are not considered in this model.
Comments
This model was based on the FRCC Guidebook PNVG model for Riparian Spruce Hardwood (RSH;
Murphy and Witten 2006) and input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07)
modeling meeting. It was refined by Michelle Schuman. The relative age function used in the RSH model
was not used in any class except A to comply with LANDFIRE modeling rules and the 10,000yr
replacement fire was removed from class D. These changes did not change the model results. Because
changes to the VDDT model were relatively minor Karen Murphy and Evie Witten were retained as
modelers and Michelle Schuman's name was added.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover)
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
LUPIN
HEDYS
EQUIS
SALIX
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
This class is characterized by post disturbance regeneration (herbs, shrub regeneration and seedlings). Silt is
deposited on the inside of river meanders following flood events. Flooding deposits seeds which germinate and
take root. Lupinus spp., Hedysarum spp., Equisetum spp. and Salix spp. colonize in the first year. Within five
years Salix spp and balsam poplar seedlings are abundant. Plant cover is 1-2% first year. Shrub cover
increases up to 40% by the fifth year, with a diverse herbaceous layer underneath. Occasionally white spruce
will germinate in large numbers on mineral soil after flooding, resulting in a dense, even-aged stand and
eventual succession to class E (via class B).
Succession to class B. Flooding (probability = 0.05), represented by Option 1 in the model, resets the age of
this class.
Class B
20 %
Mid Development 1 Closed
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
SALIX
ALNUS
POBAB2
ROAC
Upper
Upper
Upper
Lower
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Height
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 80 of 204
Description
5-29yrs
Tall shrubs (Salix spp., Alnus spp.) and saplings with a closed canopy (>60%). Saplings may consist of
balsam poplar with white spruce in the understory (succession to class C), or saplings may consist of pure,
even-aged spruce (succession to class E). Saplings overtop shrubs at 20-40yrs, when shade-intolerant pioneer
shrub species decline and shade-tolerant shrubs (Rosa acicularis (prickly rose), Viburnum edule (high
bushcranberry) become more common and have a canopy cover of 10%.
Succession to class C or E. The deterministic succession pathway is to class C. The alternate succession
pathway to E (probability = 0.01) represents possibility that white spruce will germinate in large numbers on
mineral soil after flooding, resulting in a dense, even-aged stand. Flooding (probability = 0.03), represented
by Option 1 in the model, causes a transition to class A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
40 %
Mid Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
POBAB2
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Middle
Lower
Lower
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, absence of spruce in the
overstory distinguishes class C from class E.
Description
30-149yrs
Closed balsam poplar forest. Balsam poplar is the dominant overstory species but white spruce is commonly
in the understory. Shade-tolerant shrub species persist in the understory. If spruce is present, at
approximately 100-150yrs the transition from balsam poplar to white spruce dominance begins (succession
to class D). If white spruce is not present poplar persists, the stand ages and individual trees are lost to wind,
disease or rot. Shrub cover commonly increases as the overstory canopy declines.
Succession to class D. Flooding (probability = 0.01), represented by Option 1 in the model, causes a
transition to class A. Mixed fire (MFRI = 400yrs) maintains this class.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
25 %
Late Development 1 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Min
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Height
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
150yrs+
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 81 of 204
Open white spruce forest. Spruce gains dominance over poplar and a mixed age, open stand develops. If
enough young spruce establishes as poplar declines, the canopy closes again (modeled as alternate succession
to class E). Alternatively, the stand may remain open with shrubs in the understory.
This class can persist in the absence of disturbance or follows an alternate succession pathway to E
(probability = 0.005). Flooding (probability = 0.005), represented by Option 1 in the model, causes a transition
to class A. Mixed fire (MFRI = 155yrs) causes a transition to class C.
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
10 %
Min
Late Development 1 Closed
Upper Layer Lifeform
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Height
Tree Size Class
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, dominance of spruce in the
overstory distinguishes class E from class C.
Description
30yrs+
Closed white spruce forest. These stands may be even-aged (resulting from spruce establishment on mineral
soil after a flood event (succession from class B) or mixed age (succession from class D). If succession is from
class D, occasional mature balsam poplar may persist in the overstory. As the spruce canopy closes,
feathermoss becomes dominant on the forest floor, reaching 80% cover. Rosa acicularis, Viburnum edule and
Alnus spp. may be scattered in the stand. A low shrub and herb layer may also occupy the forest floor.
This class will persist in the absence of disturbance. Flooding (probability = 0.002), represented by Option 1
in the model, causes a transition to class A. Mixed fire (MFRI = 200yrs) causes a transition to class D.
Replacement fire (MFRI = 667yrs) causes a transition to class A. Insects/disease (probability = 0.02) can
cause a transition to class D.
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
5000
312
0.0002
0.00321
294
0.00342
Percent of All Fires
6
94
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) Flooding
Other (optional 2)
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 82 of 204
References
Barney, R.J. 1971. Wildfires in Alaska – some historical and projected effects and aspects. In: Fire in the
Northern Environment – a symposium [Fairbanks, Alaska]. P. 51-59.
Boggs, K. 2000. Classification of community types, successional sequences, and landscapes of the Copper
River Delta, Alaska. Gen Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR-469. Portland, OR: USDA Forest Service, Pacific
Northwest Research Station. 244 pp.
Duchesne L.C. and B.C.Hawkes. 2000. Fire in northern ecosystems. In: Brown, J.K. and J.K Smith (eds.)
Wildland fire in ecosystems: effects of fire on flora. Gen. Tech. Rep. RMRS-GTR-42-vol 2. Ogdon, UT:
USDA Forest Service, Rocky Mountain Research Station. 257 pp.
Heinselman, M.L. 1981. Fire and succession in the conifer forests of northern North America. In: West,
D.C., H.H. Shugart, and D.B. Botkin. Forest succession: concepts and application. Springer-Verlag, New
York. Chapter 23.
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Riparian Spruce Hardwood. In Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Personal communication experts’ workshop, March 2-4 2004. Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
interagency experts’ workshop to develop and review Potential Natural Vegetation (PNV) groups for
Alaska. Anchorage, AK.
Rowe, J.S., Bergsteinsson, J. L. , Padbury, G. A.,and R. Hermesh. 1974. Fire studies in the Mackenzie
Valley. ALUR Report 73-74-61. Arctic Land Use Research Program, Department of Indian Affairs and
Human Development, Ottawa, Canada. 123 pp.
Scott, R.W. 1974. Successional patterns on moraines and outwash of the Frederika Glacier, Alaska. In:
Bushnell, V.C.; Marcus, M.G., eds. Icefield ranges research project scientific results. New York: American
Geographical Society (4): 319-329.
Shephard, M.E. 1995. Plant community ecology and classification of the Yakutat Foreland, Alaska. R10-TP56.
Thilenius, J.F. 1990. Woody plant succession on earthquake-uplifted coastal wetlands of the Copper River
Delta, Alaska. Forest Ecology and Management 33/34: 439-462.
Viereck L.A. 1966. Plant succession and soil development on gravel outwash on the Muldrow Glacier,
Alaska. Ecological Monographs. 36(3): 181-199.
Viereck, L.A. 1973. Ecological effects of river flooding and forest fires on permafrost in the taiga of Alaska.
In: Permafrost - - The North American Contribution to the Second International Conference. National
Academy of Sciences, Washington, DC. 60-67 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 83 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316142
Western North American Boreal Montane
Floodplain Forest and Shrubland - Alaska
Sub-boreal
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Montane Floodplain Forest and Shrubland was
split into a boreal and sub-boreal variant for BpS modeling so that regional
differences could be represented.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Karen Murphy
Modeler 2 Evie Witten
Modeler 3 Kori Blankenship
Map Zone
73
Forest and Woodland
POBAB2
PIGL
ALNUS
SALIX
4/14/2008
karen_a_murphy@fws.g Reviewer Tina Boucher
ov
Reviewer
ewitten@tnc.org
Reviewer
kblankenship@tnc.org
Vegetation Type
Dominant Species*
Date
Model Zone
General Model Sources
EQUIS
ROAC
VIED
SHCA
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This BpS is found throughout the AK sub-boreal region adjacent to rivers.
Biophysical Site Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
The substrate is typically well-drained sand or cobble, although finer silts and clays can be found on
higher terraces, in ponds, on distal floodplains, and in lower energy systems. Permafrost is usually absent.
Oxbows and other wet depressions commonly form on the floodplains, and these sites commonly develop
into wetlands.
Vegetation Description
Primary succession on floodplains begins when new alluvial surfaces are colonized by tree, shrub and
herbaceous species. Common early seral woody species include Populus balsamifera (seedlings), Picea
glauca (seedlings), Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Alnus incana ssp. Tenuifolia, Salix barclayi and Salix
alaxensis (Boggs 2000, Scott 1974, Shephard 1995, Thilenius 1990, Viereck 1966). Herbaceous species
may include Equisetum spp., Chamerion latifolium, Lupinus spp. and Hedysarum spp. The next seral
stage includes communities dominated by Populus balsamifera and/or Picea glauca with an understory of
Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Salix spp. and bryophytes. On dry sites the shrub layer may be dominated by
Shepherdia canadensis, Dryas octopetala, D. integrifolia and fruticose lichens (Stereocaulon spp.). The
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 84 of 204
tall shrub component of the early successional stages diminishes rapidly, probably because of decreased
light from the dense tree overstory. Populus balsamifera does not regenerate in the understory and
consequently, Picea glauca gains dominance in the overstory within 150yrs. Rosa acicularis and
Viburnum edule are common understory shrubs on older surfaces.
Disturbance Description
Flooding is the primary disturbance in this BpS. Flooding can be caused by snowmelt, precipitation, ice
jams and glacial runoff. Different rivers or portions of rivers may be more prone to certain types of
flooding. Frequent flooding and channel migration create a pattern of gravel bars and early successional
stages across the valley bottom. Sediment deposition raises the surface of the floodplain over time. As the
terrace becomes farther removed from the channel, flooding becomes less frequent. Water availability on
terraces plays a major role in community structure and composition. Water inputs are from overbank flow
(flooding), ground water, and precipitation. Deposits with high permeability become progressively drier as
they are vertically and horizontally removed from the active channels.
As discussed in the Riparian Spruce Hardwood Kenai Potential Natural Vegetation Group (PNVG) model
description (Murphy and Witten 2006), small, relatively infrequent, mixed severity fires characterize this
system due to the sites’ proximity to rivers, which act as fire breaks (Viereck 1973, Barney 1971, Foote
1983). High moisture content of the vegetation, high percentage of deciduous species, and high relative
humidity also contribute to making fires less frequent in this system than in typically adjacent upland
vegetation types.
This model includes two successional pathways: one with a hardwood stage that succeeds to an open
spruce stand and the other in which spruce establishes on mineral soil following a flood. Either of these
pathways could result in an open or closed mature spruce stand. The successional classes in this model
were defined by canopy cover classes in order to make them mappable. As a result, the system may move
back and forth between the open and closed successional classes regardless of age.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This model applies to forest and shrub systems in the active and inactive portions of the floodplain, but not
abandoned floodplains. Oxbows and other wet depressions commonly form on the floodplains. Floodplain
Wetlands are a separate ecological system and a separate BpS.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Linear.
Issues/Problems
Wetlands that occur on the floodplain are not considered in this model.
Comments
NOTE: 11/21/09: As a result of final QC for LANDFIRE National by Jennifer Long the max canopy
closure in class B was changed from “Closed (60-100% tree cover)” to “Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub
cover)” because according to LANDFIRE National rules height should only be designated for the upperlayer lifeform.
This model was based on the FRCC Guidebook PNVG model for Riparian Spruce Hardwood Kenai
(RSHK; Murphy and Witten 2006) and input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Anchorage
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 85 of 204
(Dec. 07) modeling meeting. The relative age function used in the RSHK model was not used in any class
except A to comply with LANDFIRE modeling rules. Because changes to the VDDT model were relatively
minor, Karen Murphy and Evie Witten were retained as modelers and Kori Blankenship's name was
added.
In the first draft of the model, Classes D and E were indistinguishable for mapping (because both could be
open or closed canopy forest). Tina Boucher reviewed an early draft of this model and confirmed that both
successional pathways could lead to either open or closed stands. To correct this, Colleen Ryan defined
Class D as open and Class E as closed and added an alternative succession pathway from Class E to Class
D. This is meant to represent the possibility that some closed stands could open up over time (after age
150). This change did not substantially change the class landscape percentages.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
EQUIS
SALIX
ALNUS
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover)
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
Silt is deposited on the inside of river meanders following flood events. Flooding deposits seeds which
germinate and take root. Equisetum spp. and Salix spp. colonize in the first year. Within five years Salix spp
and balsam poplar seedlings are abundant. Plant cover is 1-2% first year. Shrub cover increases up to 40% by
the fifth year, with a diverse herbaceous layer underneath. Occasionally white (or Lutz) spruce will germinate
in large numbers on mineral soil after flooding, resulting in a dense, even-aged stand. Common woody species
include Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Alnus incana ssp. tenuifolia, Salix barclayi and Salix alaxensis (Boggs
2000, Scott 1974, Shephard 1995, Thilenius 1990, Viereck 1966). Herbaceous species may include Equisetum
spp., Chamerion latifolium, Lupinus spp. and Hedysarum spp. On dry sites the shrub layer may be dominated
by Shepherdia canadensis, Dryas octopetala, D. integrifolia and fruticose lichens (Stereocaulon spp.).
Succession to class B. Flooding (probability = 0.1), represented by Option 1 in the model, resets the age of this
class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 86 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
15 %
Mid Development 1 Closed
Cover Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
SALIX
ALNUS
ROAC
VIED
Shrub
Tree
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
5-29yrs
This class is typically dominated by tall shrubs (Salix spp., Alnus spp.) and saplings with a closed canopy
(>60%). Common woody species include Alnus viridis ssp. Sinuata, Alnus incana ssp. Tenuifolia, Salix
barclayi, and Salix alaxensis. On dry sites the shrub layer may be dominated by Shepherdia canadensis,
Dryas octopetala, D. integrifolia and fruticose lichens (Steroucaulon spp.). Saplings may consist of balsam
poplar with white (or Lutz) spruce in the understory (succession to class C), or saplings may consist of pure,
even-aged spruce (succession to class E). Saplings overtop shrubs at 20-40yrs, when shade-intolerant pioneer
shrub species decline and shade-tolerant shrubs (Rosa acicularis(prickly rose), Viburnum edule (high bush
cranberry)) become more common and have a canopy cover of 10%.
Succession to class C or E. The deterministic succession pathway is to class C. The alternate succession
pathway to E (probability = 0.01) represents possibility that white spruce will germinate in large numbers on
mineral soil after flooding, resulting in a dense, even-aged stand. Flooding (probability = 0.03), represented
by Option 1 in the model, causes a transition to class A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
30 %
Mid Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
POBAB2
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
Upper
Middle
Lower
Lower
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, absence of spruce in the
overstory distinguishes class C from class E.
Description
30 –149yrs
Balsam poplar is the dominant overstory species. White spruce (or Lutz) is commonly in the understory.
Shade-tolerant shrub species persist in the understory. If spruce is present, at approximately 100-150yrs the
transition from balsam poplar to white spruce dominance begins (succession to class D). If white spruce is
not present poplar persists, the stand ages and individual trees are lost to wind, disease or rot. Shrub cover
commonly increases as the overstory canopy declines.
Succession to class D. Flooding (probability = 0.01), represented by Option 1 in the model, causes a
transition to class A. Mixed fire (MFRI = 400yrs) maintains this class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 87 of 204
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
35 %
Late Development 1 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
ALNUS
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Min
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Height
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
150yrs+
Spruce gains dominance over poplar and a mixed age, open stand develops. If enough young spruce
establishes as poplar declines, the canopy closes again (succession to class E). Alternatively, the stand may
remain open with shrubs in the understory.
This class can persist in the absence of disturbance or follows an alternate succession pathway to E
(probability = 0.005). Flooding (probability = 0.005), represented by Option 1 in the model, causes a transition
to class A. Replacement MFRI = 3000yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 800yrs) causes a transition to class C.
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
15 %
Min
Late Development 1 Closed
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
ALNUS
Lower
Lower
Lower
Lower
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Height
Tree Size Class
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, dominance of spruce in the
overstory distinguishes class E from class C.
Description
30yrs+
This class contains closed stands of white (or Lutz) spruce. These stands may be even-aged (resulting from
spruce establishment on mineral soil after a flood event (succession from class A) or mixed age (succession
from class D). If succession is from class D, occasional mature balsam poplar may persist in the overstory. As
the spruce canopy closes feathermoss becomes dominant on the forest floor, reaching 80% cover. Rosa
acicularis, Viburnum edule and Alnus spp. may be scattered in the stand. A low shrub and herb layer may
also occupy the forest floor. This class may persist in the absence of disturbance, or the canopy may open up
as the stand matures on some sites, causing a transition back to class D.
This class may persist in the absence of disturbance or may follow an alternate succession pathway to class D
after age 150yrs (probability =.005). Flooding (probability = 0.002), represented by Option 1 in the model,
causes a transition to class A. Replacement MFRI = 3000yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 800yrs) causes a transition
to class D. Insects/disease (probability = 0.02) can cause a transition to class D.
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 88 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
5000
769
0.0002
0.00130
666
0.00151
Percent of All Fires
13
86
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) Flooding
Other (optional 2)
References
Barney, R.J. 1971. Wildfires in Alaska – some historical and projected effects and aspects. In: Fire in the
Northern Environment – a symposium [Fairbanks, AK]. P. 51-59.
Boggs, K. 2000. Classification of community types, successional sequences, and landscapes of the Copper
River Delta, Alaska. Gen Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR-469. Portland, OR: USDA Forest Service, Pacific
Northwest Research Station. 244 pp.
Foote, J.M. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after
fire in the taiga of Interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR. USDA Forest Service. Pacific
Northwest Research Station. 108 pp.
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Riparian Spruce Hardwood Kenai. In Fire Regime Condition Class
(FRCC) Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Scott, R.W. 1974. Successional patterns on moraines and outwash of the Frederika Glacier, Alaska. In:
Bushnell, V.C.; Marcus, M.G., eds. Icefield ranges research project scientific results. New York: American
Geographical Society (4): 319-329.
Shephard, M.E. 1995. Plant community ecology and classification of the Yakutat Foreland, Alaska. R10-TP56.
Thilenius, J.F. 1990. Woody plant succession on earthquake-uplifted coastal wetlands of the Copper River
Delta, Alaska. Forest Ecology and Management 33/34: 439-462.
Viereck, L.A. 1966. Plant succession and soil development on gravel outwash on the Muldrow Glacier,
Alaska. Ecological Monographs. 36(3):181-199.
Viereck, L.A. 1973. Ecological effects of river flooding and forest fires on permafrost in the taiga of Alaska.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 89 of 204
In: Permafrost - - The North American Contribution to the Second International Conference. National
Academy of Sciences, Washington, DC. 60-67 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 90 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316150
Western North American Boreal Lowland
Large River Floodplain Forest and Shrubland
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Date
3/11/2008
Modeler 1 Kori Blankenship
kblankenship@tnc.org
Modeler 2 Robert Lambrecht
Robert_Lambrecht@fws Reviewer
.gov
tom.paragi@alaska.go
v
Reviewer
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Forest and Woodland
Dominant Species*
PIGL
POBAB2
SALIX
ALNUS
Reviewer Tom Paragi
General Model Sources
ROAC
VIED
LUPIN
EQUIS
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This type is found in the AK boreal region associated with high volume interior rivers such as the Yukon,
Kuskokwim, Koyukuk and Tanana.
Biophysical Site Description
This system includes large floodplains associated with high volume interior rivers. The flooding regime is
characterized by large spring floods at break-up caused by ice jams or summer floods caused by extreme
rain events, the latter sometimes in combination with glacial melt. The active flooding zone often can be
several kilometers wide (NatureServe 2008). Permafrost is usually absent, but can be present in small
lenses. Ice scouring and ice dams are important dynamics that result in regeneration of willow carrs on
the active floodplain and less frequently on higher terraces (NatureServe 2008). Wetland development in
abandoned channels is intermixed with succession on more mesic sites (NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
Primary succession on floodplains begins when new alluvial surfaces are colonized by tree, shrub and
herbaceous species. Common woody species include Populus balsamifera, Picea glauca, Alnus viridis ssp.
sinuata, Alnus incana ssp. tenuifolia, Salix barclayi and Salix alaxensis (Boggs 2000, Scott 1974,
Shephard 1995, Thilenius 1990, Viereck 1966). Common early seral herbaceous species may include
Lupinus spp., Hedysarum spp. and Equisetum spp. The next seral stage includes communities dominated
by Populus balsamifera and/or (less commonly) Picea glauca with an understory of Alnus viridis ssp.
sinuata, Salix spp. and bryophytes or uniform stands of Salix alaxensis. On dry sites the shrub layer may
be dominated by Dryas octopetala, D. integrifolia and fruticose lichens (Steroucaulon spp.). The tall shrub
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 91 of 204
component of the early successional stages diminishes rapidly because of decreased light from the dense
tree overstory and high levels of herbivory by moose or snowshoe hares may accelerate succession (Butler
et al. 2007). Populus balsamifera does not regenerate in the understory and consequently, Picea glauca
gains dominance in the overstory within 150yrs. Rosa acicularis and Viburnum edule are common
understory shrubs in semi-open older stands.
Disturbance Description
Flooding can be caused by snow melt, precipitation, ice jams and glacial runoff. Different rivers or
portions of rivers may be more prone to certain types of flooding. Frequent flooding and channel migration
create a pattern of gravel bars and early successional stages across the valley bottom. Sediment deposition
raises the surface of the floodplain over time. As the terrace becomes farther removed from the channel,
flooding becomes less frequent. Water availability on terraces plays a major role in community structure
and composition. Water inputs are from overbank flow (flooding), ground water, and precipitation.
Deposits with high permeability become progressively drier as they are vertically and horizontally
removed from the active channels.
Oxbows and other wet depressions commonly form on the floodplains, and develop into wetlands.
Succession and species composition is variable due to diverse environmental conditions such as water
depth, substrate and nutrient input. Aquatic bed, marsh and fen communities are common.
Fire frequency in floodplain systems is considerably less than that of the surrounding terrain because
channels can act as fuel breaks. Early seral vegetation is less flammable than mature boreal forest, which
may develop an organic soil layer that can spread fire into the floodplain in dry years. Fires burn in an
irregular pattern due to the variability of vegetation and soil moisture, resulting in a high degree of edge.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This system is found adjacent to a range of upland systems, including hardwoods (birch-dominated),
upland white spruce, white spruce-hardwood, as well as all boreal black spruce types.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Linear.
Issues/Problems
Frequency of major flood events on the larger rivers seems to be lower compared with the middle 20th
Century, as evident from the age of Salix alaxensis cohorts on higher terraces. With the advent of climate
change and changing weather patterns, historical ice scouring/jamming and flooding events are no longer
common. The decline in floods that deposit a silt cap for willow and poplar regeneration and in ice
scouring that rejuvenates willows could have a major impact on reducing the amount of available winter
forage for moose, an important game species in interior AK.
Comments
This model was based on the FRCC Guidebook Potential Natural Vegetation Group (PNVG) model for
Riparian Spruce Hardwood (RISH; Murphy and Witten 2006), input from the experts who attended the
LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07) modeling meeting and was refined by Kori Blankenship and Robert
Lambrecht. The resulting model is similar to RISH but with minor adjustments to some of the class ages,
the removal of replacement fire in class D, and the removal of the relative age setting for mixed fire in
class B, which violated LANDFIRE modeling rules.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 92 of 204
The vegetation description is closely based on the Ecological System description (NatureServe 2008), with
minor edits by Robert Lambrecht.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
EQUIS
SALIX
POBAB2
LUPIN
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Height
Tree Size Class
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-4yrs
Post disturbance regeneration. This class can include gravel bar, herbs, shrub regeneration and seedlings. Silt
is deposited on the inside of river meanders following flood events, although it can occur on higher terraces.
Flooding deposits seeds which germinate and take root. Equisetum spp. and Salix spp. colonize in the first
year. Within five years Salix spp. and balsam poplar seedlings are abundant. Plant cover is 1-20% in the first
year. Shrub cover increases up to 40% by the fifth year, with a diverse herbaceous layer underneath. Lupinus
and Hedysarum are common herbaceous species in this stage.
Succession to class B. Flooding (probability = 0.05), represented by Option 1 in the model, resets the age of
this class.
Class B
10 %
Mid Development 1 Closed
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
SALIX
ALNUS
POBAB2
ROAC
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Height
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
5-19yrs
Tall shrubs (Salix spp., Alnus spp., Populus balsamifera) and saplings with a closed canopy (>60%).
Saplings may consist of Salix alaxensis (dominant) or balsam poplar, with white spruce in the understory
(succession to class C), or saplings may consist of pure, even-aged spruce (succession to class E). Saplings
overtop shrubs at 15-40yrs, when shade-intolerant pioneer shrub species decline and shade-tolerant shrubs
(Rosa acicularis, Viburnum edule) become more common and have a canopy cover of 10%. Uncommonly,
white spruce may germinate in large numbers on mineral soil after flooding, resulting in a dense, even-aged
stand.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 93 of 204
Succession to class C or E. The deterministic succession pathway is to class C. The alternate succession
pathway to E (probability = 0.01) represents the possibility that white spruce will germinate in large numbers
on mineral soil after flooding, resulting in a dense, even-aged stand. Flooding (probability = 0.03),
represented by Option 1 in the model, causes a transition to class A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
50 %
Mid Development 2 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
POBAB2
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Middle
Lower
Lower
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Presence of hardwoods distinguishes class C
from classes D and E.
Description
20-149yrs
Balsam poplar is the dominant overstory species, though white spruce may co-dominate. White spruce is
commonly in the understory. Shade-tolerant shrub species persist in the understory. If spruce is present, at
approximately 100-150yrs the transition from balsam poplar to white spruce dominance begins (succession
to class D). If white spruce is not present, poplar persists, the stand ages and individual trees are lost to
wind, disease or rot. Shrub cover commonly increases as the overstory canopy declines. Stands tend to be
closed but can be open depending on site conditions.
Succession to class D. Flooding (probability = 0.01), represented by Option 1 in the model, causes a
transition to class A. Mixed fire (MFRI = 400yrs) maintains this class.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
25 %
Late Development 1 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
ALNUS
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Cover
Height
Min
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
150-400yrs
Open white spruce. Spruce gains dominance over poplar and a mixed age, open stand develops. If enough
young spruce establishes as poplar declines, the canopy closes again (succession to class E). Alternatively, the
stand may remain open with shrubs in the understory. Feathermosses may dominate the forest floor.
This class can persist in the absence of disturbance or follow an alternate succession pathway to E (probability
= 0.005). Flooding (probability = 0.005), represented by Option 1 in the model, causes a transition to class A.
Mixed fire (MFRI = 150yrs) causes a transition to class C.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 94 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
10 %
Min
Late Development 1 Closed
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
PIGL
ROAC
VIED
ALNUS
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
20-400yrs
Closed white spruce. These stands can be even-aged (resulting from spruce establishment on mineral soil
after a flood event (succession from class B) or mixed age (succession from class D). If succession is from
class D, occasional mature balsam poplar may persist in the overstory. As the spruce canopy closes
feathermoss becomes dominant on the forest floor, reaching 80% cover. Rosa acicularis, Viburnum edule and
Alnus spp. may be scattered in the stand. A low shrub and herb layer may also occupy the forest floor.
In the absence of disturbance, this class is self-replacing, with single tree or larger openings filled in by white
spruce seedlings established in the understory. If the class begins as an even-aged stand, it will become
uneven-aged over time.
This class will persist in the absence of disturbance. Flooding (probability = 0.002), represented by Option 1
in the model, causes a transition to class A. Mixed fire (MFRI = 200yrs) causes a transition to class D.
Replacement fire (MFRI = 667yrs) causes a transition to class A. Insects/disease (probability = 0.02) can
cause a transition to class D.
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
9999
303
0.00010
0.00330
294
0.00341
Percent of All Fires
3
97
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) Flooding
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K. 2000. Classification of community types, successional sequences, and landscapes of the Copper
River Delta, Alaska. Gen Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR-469. Portland, OR: USDA Forest Service, Pacific
Northwest Research Station. 244 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 95 of 204
Butler, L.G., K. Kielland, T.S. Rupp and T.A. Hanley. 2007. Interactive controls of herbivory and fluvial
dynamics over vegetation patterns along the Tanana River, interior Alaska. J. Biogeography 34: 1622-1631.
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Riparian Spruce Hardwood. In Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Scott, R.W. 1974. Successional patterns on moraines and outwash of the Frederika Glacier, Alaska. In:
Bushnell, V.C.; Marcus, M.G., eds. Icefield ranges research project scientific results. New York: American
Geographical Society (4): 319-329.
Shephard, M.E. 1995. Plant community ecology and classification of the Yakutat Foreland, Alaska. R10-TP56.
Thilenius, J.F. 1990. Woody plant succession on earthquake-uplifted coastal wetlands of the Copper River
Delta, Alaska. Forest Ecology and Management 33/34: 439-462.
Viereck L.A. 1966. Plant succession and soil development on gravel outwash on the Muldrow Glacier,
Alaska. Ecological Monographs. 36(3): 181-199.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 96 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316160
Western North American Boreal Riparian
Stringer Forest and Shrubland
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Nancy Fresco
Modeler 2 Colleen Ryan
Modeler 3 Douglas Hanson
Reviewer Marc Lee
marc.lee@alaska.gov
Reviewer Tom Kurkowski
douglas.hanson@alaska
.gov
Reviewer Tom Paragi
thomas.kurkowski@al
aska.gov
tom.paragi@alaska.go
v
Map Zone
73
Wetlands/Riparian
PIGL
BEPA
PIMA
POBA2
4/7/2008
nancyfresco@hotmail.c
om
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
Vegetation Type
Dominant Species*
Date
General Model Sources
POTR5
SALIX
ALNUS
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs along streams throughout the boreal and sub-boreal regions of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
The riparian forest and shrub stringer is found as a narrow band of vegetation along streams in low
gradient and low volume drainages (NatureServe 2008). Although, seasonal overbank flooding may
occur, it generally does not result in shifting channels or gravel bar formation (NatureServe 2008). The
well-drained soils have moderately thick to thin organic horizons at the surface (indicative of infrequent
flooding), are strongly acidic, lack permafrost, and have deep water tables (Jorgenson et al. 1999).
Vegetation Description
The mature phase of this system is dominated by Picea glauca, Betula papyrifera and Picea mariana.
Populus balsamifera and Populus tremuloides are common early seral species on some sites. Picea
mariana is more common and more likely to be dominant in the northern parts of this system’s range.
Common understory species include Alnus tenuifolia, Rosa acicularis, Calamagrostis canadensis, Cornus
canadensis, Equisetum arvense, Hylocomium splendens and Rhytidiadelphus triquetrus (Jorgenson et al.
1999).
Immediately adjacent to the stream bank and in recently burned areas, tall shrubs including Alnus
tenuifolia, Salix. alaxensis, S. bebbiana and S. lasiandra tend to dominate, with Carex spp. and
Calamagrostis canadensis in the understory (NatureServe 2008, Jorgenson et al. 1999).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 97 of 204
Disturbance Description
Fire is the primary disturbance influencing this system. However, riparian forest and shrub stringers
typically burn less frequently than adjacent vegetation types and tend to act as fire breaks.
Because of the linear nature of this system, fire frequencies are strongly influenced by surrounding
vegetation types. In the sub-boreal region, surrounding vegetation is more likely to be white spruce and
hardwood forest. In the northern boreal region, adjacent forest is more likely to be a black spruce type that
burns more frequently. However, this system may also occur in tundra areas where there is a gap in the
permafrost layer along the riparian corridor. The riparian stringer in this environment will have a very
low fire frequency. As a result, fire frequencies are likely to be more variable in the boreal region
compared with the sub-boreal region.
For this model, the overall mean fire return interval was estimated at about 170yrs, somewhat longer than
the MFRI for the white spruce-hardwood systems and substantially longer than the black spruce types.
This reflects the observation that fires from the surrounding forest types frequently burn into the riparian
stringer types, but often do not burn across the river or stream. Patchy, mixed severity fire is thought to be
more common in this type than in most other spruce-hardwood types.
Seasonal overbank flooding may occur, but it generally does not result in shifting channels or gravel bar
formation (NatureServe 2008). As a result, flooding typically only acts as a disturbance in a narrow zone
along the bank. This zone will typically remain in a self-replacing shrub stage. This disturbance is
modeled as Option 1 in the VDDT model. Beaver activity may play a role in the dynamics of this system,
but it is not included in the model due to the limited scale of these impacts.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
See the Disturbance Description for more information on adjacent types.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Linear
Issues/Problems
The main factor controlling the disturbance regime in this system is its ecological setting. Ideally, we
would create a separate model for this system on sites where the adjacent systems are non-forested. If
these sites cannot be distinguished, then it is probably not worth creating separate models for the boreal
and sub-boreal regions, as the MFRI is probably similar for the two regions.
A reviewer noted that the age of transition from the shrub/sapling class to the forest class may vary
widely depending on the tree species present. Hardwoods will begin to overtop the shrubs around age
15yrs, but this stage will be very difficult to distinguish from the shrub stage using satellite imagery.
Spruce-dominated stands may not transition from class A to B for much longer, as it may take black
spruce 30yrs to reach three meters in height.
Classes B and C may overlap in canopy composition. For the purposes of this model, it has been assumed
that class B will have >50% hardwoods in the canopy and class C will have >50% spruce, but there will
be exceptions to this rule in reality.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 98 of 204
Comments
The draft version of this model was created by Nancy Fresco and Colleen Ryan based in part on input from
the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Anchorage (Dec. 07) modeling meeting. Extensive review by the
Alaska Dept. of Natural Resources Div. of Forestry led to extensive changes to the model. As a result, lead
reviewer Douglas Hanson was added as a modeler. The other Div. of Forestry reviewers, Marc Lee,
Northern Region Forest Manager, and Tom Kurkowski, GIS specialist, were listed as reviewers. Will
Putnam (wputman@tananachiefs.org) reviewed an early draft of this model.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
10 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
SALIX
ALNUS
CAREX
CACA4
Upper
Upper
Lower
Low-Mi
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-15yrs
Shrub-sapling. This stage is dominated by shrubs but trees begin to sprout and saplings may be present.
Around age 15yrs, the hardwood saplings will begin to overtop the shrubs, though the spruce saplings will
still be in the understory.
Common shrub species include a variety of Salix spp. and Alnus tenuifolia. Herbs frequently include
Calamagrostis canadensis, Equisetum arvense and Carex spp.
This class includes those areas immediately adjacent to the stream bank that are dominated by shrubs
maintained by frequent flooding. These areas are unlikely to burn. The 0.1 annual probability of flooding in
this class is meant to represent these areas.
Succession is to class B at age 15yrs. Replacement MFRI = 333yrs. Flooding (Option 1) probability = 0.1.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
40 %
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BEPA
PIGL
PIMA
ALNUS
Upper
Upper
Upper
Middle
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, the presence of hardwoods
distinguishes class B from class C.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 99 of 204
Description
16-119yrs
White spruce-hardwood mix. This is a mixed white spruce (black spruce) hardwood forest. Black spruce is
more common and hardwoods are less common in the northern boreal region. Early in this age range,
hardwoods will dominate the overstory. Spruce species typically will not overtop the shrub layer until age 3050yrs. By the end of this age range, the canopy will typically be dominated by a mixture of birch and spruce.
Species composition is highly variable in this class, depending on landscape context, site characteristics,
disturbance history and available seed sources. Picea glauca, Betula papyrifera, Populus balsamifera, Alnus
spp. and Salix spp. typically dominate the overstory, though Picea mariana may be common, especially in the
northern boreal region. The understory commonly includes Rosa acicularis, Carex spp. and Calamagrostis
canadensis. Though species composition is highly variable, this class can be distinguished for mapping
purposes by canopy composition (>50% hardwoods).
Succession is to class B at age 120yrs. Replacement MFRI = 500yrs. Mixed MFRI = 220yrs (system stays in
class B).
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
50 %
Late Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
BEPA
POBA2
PIMA
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
This class may include some senescing
hardwoods in the canopy, but the canopy
should be at least 75% spruce.
Description
120yrs+
Mature spruce forest. This class is typically dominated by mature spruce (>50% spruce in the canopy). More
northern sites will have more black spruce, while more southern sites will be mostly white spruce. However,
when these stands extend to the far north of the boreal region, such as the south slopes of the Brooks Range,
white spruce will dominate over black spruce. Birch frequently persists in the canopy but typically will
constitute <50% of the canopy.
Understory plants include Alnus tenuifolia, Rosa acicularis, Cornus canadensis, Equisetum arvense,
Hylocomium splendens and Rhytidiadelphus triquetrus (Jorgenson et al. 1999).
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 400yrs. Mixed MFRI = 220yrs
(system transitions to class B).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 100 of 204
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
III
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
434.8
243.9
0.0023
0.0041
156
0.00641
Percent of All Fires
36
64
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) Flooding
Other (optional 2)
References
Foote, M. Joan. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after fire in the Taiga
of Interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR: USDA Forest Service, Pacific Northwest Forest and
Range Experiment Station. 108 pp.
Jorgenson, M.T., J.E. Roth, M.K. Raynolds, M.D. Smith, W. Lentz, A.L. Zusi-Cobb and C.H. Racine.
1999. An ecological land survey for Fort Wainwright, Alaska. U.S. Army Cold Regions Research and
Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, NH. CRREL TR-99-9. 92 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 101 of 204
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 102 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316170
Western North American Boreal Shrub and
Herbaceous Floodplain Wetland
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Date
5/7/2008
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Reviewer Michelle Schuman michelle.schuman@a
Modeler 2 Kori Blankenship
Modeler 3 Colleen Ryan
kblankenship@tnc.org
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
Reviewer
k.usda.gov
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Wetlands/Riparian
Dominant Species*
METR3
CAAQ
EQFL
COPA28
Reviewer
General Model Sources
ERAN6
MYGA
BENA
CHCA2
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system is found throughout the boreal and sub-boreal regions. It occurs within the floodplain
boundaries of the Western North American Boreal Montane Floodplain Forest and Shrubland - Boreal,
Western North American Boreal Lowland Large River Floodplain Forest and Shrubland and Western
North American Boreal Montane Floodplain Forest and Shrubland - Alaska Sub-boreal.
Biophysical Site Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
Floodplain wetlands occur within the active and inactive portions of floodplain systems. Wetlands
develop on poorly drained deposits, oxbows and abandoned channels and are often mosaiced with welldrained floodplain vegetation.
Vegetation Description
Species composition is variable due to diverse environmental conditions such as water depth, substrate
and nutrient input, as well as seral stage. Aquatic bed, marsh and fen communities are common. The
earliest seral stages (aquatic bed) have aquatic vegetation such as Nuphar polysepala. Aquatic vegetation
generally succeeds to marsh and fen communities with species such as Menyanthes trifoliata, Carex
aquatilis and Equisetum fluviatile. Later seral stages of floodplain wetland development may include
Sedge-Dwarf-Shrub Bogs and Low Shrub Peatland. Common species may include Sphagnum spp.,
Eriophorum angustifolium, Oxycoccus microcarpus, Andromeda polifolia, Myrica gale and Betula nana.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 103 of 204
Disturbance Description
Fire is likely quite rare on floodplain wetlands and was not included in the VDDT model.
The following paragraph was taken from the draft North Pacific Maritime Ecological Systems description
(NatureServe 2008):
Frequent river channel migration and associated flooding and fluvial processes constitute the major
disturbances. Floodplain wetland dynamics differ from wetlands in non-floodplain settings. Surface
flooding and subsurface flow provide a more continuous flow of nutrients and create the potential for a
more dynamic wetland environment. Wetland succession and species composition are variable due to
diverse environmental conditions such as water depth, substrate, and nutrient input. Common seral stages
include aquatic bed, freshwater marsh, fen and wet low shrub. Wetland succession beginning in open
water can proceed through aquatic bed and marsh communities to fens and wet meadows. Over time, fens
can succeed to Sedge-Dwarf-Shrub Bogs or Low Shrub Peatlands. At any stage in succession, flooding can
set back the vegetation to open water. Less dramatic changes in hydrology (such as an increase in water
table from beaver activity) can reverse the direction of succession. Though an open water stage is part of
the successional pathway, it is not included in the model due to LANDFIRE mapping constraints.
Floodplain wetlands can also develop through paludification on poorly drained, fine-textured deposits. In
this pathway, poorly-drained shrubs would accumulate organic material in the ground layer and succeed to
a fen/wet meadow or Sedge-Dwarf-Shrub bog.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Floodplain wetland vegetation includes the following classes: Freshwater Aquatic Bed, Freshwater
Emergent Marsh, Wet Meadow or Herbaceous Fen, Low Shrub Peatland, and Sedge-Dwarf-Shrub Bog.
These classes have also been described as unique Ecological Systems, but because floodplain wetland
dynamics are different from wetland dynamics outside the floodplain, they are considered a distinct BpS
and modeled accordingly.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Floodplain wetland vegetation tends to occur in small, linear patches. Fire is rare (not modeled) but if it
occurred would likely occur in very small patches moving into the floodplain from adjacent upland
systems.
Issues/Problems
The lack of information about the successional dynamics of this system and the variability of
environmental conditions across floodplain wetlands make it difficult to quantitatively model this BpS.
The class percents also likely vary from site to site making it difficult to define a historic range of
variability for FRCC calculation.
In a true model of ecological dynamics, class A would include areas of sparse and submerged vegetation
and open water. Since these areas will be excluded from the LANDFIRE mapping process, they were
excluded from the model, and the landscape percentages for the successional classes reflect only the areas
that are expected to map as vegetated ( >10% cover).
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks modeling
meeting (Nov. 07) and refined by Tina Boucher, Kori Blankenship and Colleen Ryan.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 104 of 204
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
20 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
NULUP
POTAM
SPARG
RATR
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
Freshwater Aquatic Bed
This is an early seral stage dominated by open water and aquatic vegetation occurring in oxbows, abandoned
channels, or other shallow slow-moving water within the floodplain. Common species include Nuphar
polysepalum, Potamogeton spp., Lemna minor, Sparganium spp., Ranunculus trichophyllus and
Myriophyllum spp. Aquatic mosses such as Calliergon sarmentosum may also be present (Viereck et al. 1992).
This class can persist or follow an alternate succession pathway to class B (probability = 0.15). Flooding
(probability = 0.07) can reset the age of this class to zero.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
15 %
Early Development 2 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
METR3
EQFL
TYLA
COPA28
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Tree Size Class
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
One year plus
Freshwater Emergent Marsh
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
Marsh systems within the floodplain are typically semi-permanently flooded or have seasonal flooding. Water
is at or above the surface for most of the growing season (typically at least 10 cm above the surface). Soils are
muck or mineral, and water is nutrient-rich. These systems are highly productive and have high rates of
decomposition (National Wetlands Working Group 1997). Freshwater marsh vegetation is dominated by
emergent vegetation such as Carex utriculata, Scirpus validus, Typha latifolia, Menyanthes trifoliata,
Equisetum fluviatile and Comarum palustris (Gracz 2005, Viereck et al. 1992). Aquatic plants such as
Potamogeton spp. and Myriophyllum spp. May also be common (Viereck et al. 1992).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 105 of 204
This class can persist or follow an alternate succession pathway to class C (probability = .1). Flooding
(probability = 0.07) can cause a transition to class A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
30 %
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
METR3
CAAQ
EQFL
COPA28
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
One year plus
Wet Meadow or Herbaceous Fen
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
Fens are nutrient-rich and have a thick peat layer that may be floating or submerged. Standing water is
usually present (Viereck et al. 1992). Dominant species may include Menyanthes trifoliata, Equisetum
fluviatile, Comarum palustris, Calla palustris, Eriophorum angustifolium, and Carex aquatilis. Other
common but non-dominant species include Caltha palustris, Cicuta makenzieana, Galium trifidum, Rumex
arcticus and Utricularia spp., (Racine and Walters 1994). Standing water is often present. Shrubs, including
Myrica gale, Salix candida, Betula nana and Alnus incana spp. tenuifolia, are occasionally present, but do
not exceed 25% cover. Aquatic plants such as Myriophyllum spicatum, Hippuris vulgaris, Potamogeton spp.
and Sparganium spp. may be present, and aquatic mosses are often present (Viereck et al. 1992). This
system may be seral to poor fens and bogs.
This class can persist or follow an alternate succession pathway to class D (probability = 0.02) or class E
(probability = 0.005). Flooding (probability = 0.03) can cause a transition to class A.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
20 %
Mid Development 2 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
MYGA
BENA
CHCA2
SAPU15
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
One year plus
Low Shrub Peatland
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe 2008):
This mid to late seral stage includes low shrub-dominated wetlands within the floodplain. Common species
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 106 of 204
include Betula nana, Myrica gale, Ledum groenlandicum, Salix fuscescens, S. pulchra, Empetrum nigrum,
Chamaedaphne calyculata and Sphagnum spp. Soils are saturated for at least a portion of the growing season.
Sites may be bogs, fens, or wetlands with <40cm of peat. Myrica gale and Chamaedaphne calyculata are
indicators of fen conditions.
This class will persist in the absence of disturbance or follow an alternate succession pathway to class E
(probability = 0.01). Flooding (probability = 0.02) can cause a transition to class A.
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
15 %
Min
Late Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
SPHAG2
VAOX
ANPO
ERAN6
Lower
Upper
Upper
Upper
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Height
Tree Size Class
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
One year plus
Sphagnum peatlands, Sedge-Dwarf-Shrub Bog or poor fen.
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
This class is a late seral stage of the riparian wetland system. It includes bogs and poor fens with thick
(>40cm) peat deposits. Organic soils are acidic and nutrient poor. Common species include Oxycoccus
microcarpus, Andromeda polifolia, Rubus chamaemorus, Vaccinium uliginosum, Ledum groenlandicum,
Betula nana, Empetrum nigrum, Carex microglochin, C. rotundata, C. rariflora, C. lasiocarpa,C. limosa, C.
chordorrhiza, Eriophorum brachyantherum, E. angustifolium and Drosera spp. Sphagnum spp. are usually
abundant in the ground layer.
This class will persist in the absence of disturbance. Flooding (probability = 0.02) can cause a transition to
class A.
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
NA
Fire Intervals
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Mixed
Surface
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 107 of 204
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) Flooding
Other (optional 2)
References
Gracz, M., K. Noyes, P. North and G. Tande. 2005 Wetland Mapping and Classification of the Kenai
Lowland, Alaska. http://www.kenaiwetlands.net/.
National Wetlands Working Group. 1997. Wetlands of Canada. C.D.A Rubec (ed.). Ecological Land
Classification Series No. 24. Environment Canada, Ottawa, and Polyscience Publications Inc., Montreal.
452 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for the Alaska North Pacific Maritime Region.
Racine, C.H., and J.C. Walters. 1994. Groundwater-discharge fens in the Tanana Lowlands, Interior
Alaska, USA. Arctic and Alpine Research 26: (4) 418-426.
Viereck, L.A., Dyrness, C.T., Batten, A.R., Wenzlick, K.J. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification.
Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286.
278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 108 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316181
Western North American Boreal Herbaceous
Fen - Alaska Sub-Boreal Complex
This BPS is lumped with: see below
This BPS is split into multiple models: This BpS was created by merging several Ecological Systems:
Western North American Boreal Freshwater Emergent Marsh (in part)
Western North American Boreal Herbaceous Fen
Western North American Boreal Wet Meadow (in part)
Western North American Boreal Low Shrub Peatland
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Torre Jorgenson
Date
4/21/2008
tjorgenson@abrinc.com
Reviewer Michelle Schuman michelle.schuman@a
k.usda.gov
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Wetlands/Riparian
Dominant Species*
MYGA
BENA
CHCA2
SAPU15
General Model Sources
COPA28
METR3
EQFL
CACA4
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs throughout the sub-boreal region of AK and on sites without permafrost in the boreal
region.
Biophysical Site Description
This model applies to sites with open hydrology and without permafrost in the Sub-boreal and Boreal
regions. Typical sites include drainages and pond margins. In the early successional marsh stage, sites
may be semi-permanently flooded, and seasonal flooding is common in the wetter classes. In later stages,
soils are saturated for at least a portion of the growing season. An organic peat layer is usually present
except in the marsh class, but peat depth is variable.
Vegetation Description
This system is a complex of four wetland types with varied characteristic vegetation, as follows.
Freshwater Emergent Marsh Class: Freshwater marsh vegetation may be dominated by emergent sedges,
forbs, or grasses. Species that often dominate or codominate include Carex utriculata, Scirpus validus,
Arctophila fulva, Eleocharis palustris, Myriophyllum spicatum, Typha latifolia Menyanthes trifoliata,
Comarum palustris, Hippuris vulgaris and Equisetum fluviatile (Gracz 2005, Jorgenson 1999). Arctophila
fulva becomes more common in the northern portions of boreal Alaska (NatureServe 2008).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 109 of 204
Herbaceous Fen Class: Fens are nutrient-rich and have a thick peat layer (herbaceous peat or sphagnum
peat) that may be floating or submerged. Common species include Menyanthes trifoliata, Potentilla
palustris, Equisetum fluviatile, Potentilla palustris and Carex aquatilis (NatureServe 2008).
Wet Sedge Meadow Class: Dominant species may include Carex aquatilis, C. livida, C. chordorrhiza, C.
lasiocarpa, Eriophorum angustifolium, Calamagrostis canadensis, Comarum palustre, Menyanthes
trifoliata, Equisetum fluviatile and E. palustre. Shrubs may be a minor component of the canopy cover
and include Myrica gale, Alnus incana ssp. Tenuifolia and Salix spp. (NatureServe 2008).
Low Shrub Peatland Class: Common species include Ledum palustre or L. groenlandicum, Betula nana,
Rubus chamaemorus, Oxycoccus microcarpus, Myrica gale, Calamagrostis canadensis, Carex aquatilis,
Comarum palustre, Salix fuscescens, S. pulchra, Empetrum nigrum and Chamaedaphne calyculata.
Sphagnum spp. And/or brown mosses may be common in the ground layer (DeVelice et al. 1999,
Jorgenson et al 2003).
Disturbance Description
The dominant factor governing the dynamics of this wetland complex system is hydrology. Changes in
water level or frequency and duration of flooding can cause transitions among all four classes in this
model. Each of the classes may be stable for long periods under appropriate hydrological conditions.
A typical successional pathway may begin with open water or a freshwater aquatic bed (not included in
this model because they are sparsely vegetated) and progress to marsh vegetation, possibly with some open
water or floating vegetation. From there, the system typically moves to herbaceous fen vegetation, then to
a wet sedge meadow and finally to low shrub peatland vegetation, as the site becomes drier. However,
large increases in the frequency or severity of flooding may send any of these vegetation types back to the
marsh system. Smaller increases in water levels may send the system back to wet meadow or fen
vegetation.
Hydrologic changes may also cause a site to transition out of this system entirely, as when a marsh or fen
is cut off from any inflow of water, leading to paludification. This could move the site into the Boreal
Sedge-Dwarf-Shrub Bog or Alaska Sub-Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce Complex model.
Fire occurs very rarely in this system, though most of the classes may burn in very dry years. Fire effects
are very complex in these wetland types.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Small patch to large patch
Issues/Problems
Comments
Vegetation Classes
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 110 of 204
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
TYLA
CARO6
SCTA2
Upper
Middle
Upper
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, this class should be
distinguished by existing vegetation type.
Description
Zero years plus
Freshwater Marsh
This is a freshwater marsh, typically including some open water and emergent vegetation dominated by
cattails and Carex rostrata. Other emergent sedges, forbs, or grasses may dominate, and floating aquatic
begetation may also be present. Other species that often dominate or codominate include Carex utriculata,
Schoenoplectus tabernaemontani (syn. Scirpus validus), Arctophila fulva, Eleocharis palustris, Myriophyllum
spicatum, Menyanthes trifoliata, Comarum palustris, Hippuris vulgaris and Equisetum fluviatile (Gracz 2005,
Jorgenson 1999). Arctophila fulva becomes more common in the northern portions of boreal AK.
This stage may be preceded by an open water/aquatic bed class (not included in this model due to mapping
constraints).
This class may replace itself under stable hydrologic conditions (frequent flooding). Under drying conditions,
alternate succession may go to class B after two years (probability = 0.5).
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Mid Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
METR3 Upper
COPA28 Upper
EQFL
Upper
Upper
Tree Size Class
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, this class should be
distinguished by existing vegetation type.
Description
Three years plus
Herbaceous Fen
This class includes fen vegetation, often with standing water. Common species include Menyanthes trifoliata,
Comarum palustre (syn. Potentilla palustris), Equisetum fluviatile, Potentilla palustris and Carex aquatilis.
This class may replace itself under stable hydrologic conditions (frequent flooding). Under drying conditions,
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 111 of 204
alternate succession may go to class C after age five years (probability = 0.15). Increased water level
(modeled as Option 1; probability = 0.01) will set the system back to marsh (class A).
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
40 %
Late Development 1 Closed
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
CAREX Upper
ERAN6 Upper
CACA4 Upper
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Shrubs may be present in the canopy, but at
<25% cover. For mapping, this class should be
distinguished by existing vegetation type.
Description
6+ years
Wet Meadow
This class represents a Wet Sedge Meadow type. Dominant species may include Carex aquatilis, C. livida,
C. chordorrhiza, C. lasiocarpa, Eriophorum angustifolium, Calamagrostis canadensis, Comarum palustre,
Menyanthes trifoliata, Equisetum fluviatile and E. palustre. Shrubs may be a minor component of the canopy
cover and include Myrica gale, Alnus incana ssp. tenuifolia, and Salix spp. In this class, soils are saturated
at some point during the growing season, but do not have standing water. Wet meadows typically have a
well-developed organic mat but not deep enough to be considered peatlands (NatureServe 2008).
This class may replace itself under stable hydrologic conditions (saturated soils). Under drying conditions,
alternate succession may go to class D after age 25yrs (probability = 0.15). Increased water level (modeled as
Option 1; probability = 0.01) will set the system back to marsh (class A).
Class D
50 %
Late Development 2 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
MYGA
BENA
CHCA2
SAPU15
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Height
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, this class should be
distinguished by existing vegetation type.
Description
26yrs+
Low Shrub Peatland
This class is characterized by Wet Low Shrub vegetation. Common species include Ledum palustre, L.
groenlandicum, Betula nana, Rubus chamaemorus, Oxycoccus microcarpus, Myrica gale, Calamagrostis
canadensis, Carex aquatilis, Comarum palustre, Salix fuscescens, S. pulchra, Empetrum nigrum and
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 112 of 204
Chamaedaphne calyculata. Sphagnum spp. and/or brown mosses may be common in the ground layer
(DeVelice et al. 1999, Jorgenson et al 2003). Soils are saturated for at least a portion of the growing season,
and a peat layer is usually present but variable in depth.
This class is distinguished from the Boreal Low Shrub Peatland stage of the Boreal Lowland Wet Black
Spruce Complex model by the increased dominance of Myrica gale, Chamaedaphne calyculata and Salix
pulchra, and the decrease in Betula nana and ericaceous shrubs.
This class maintains itself in the absence of disturbance. Substantial flooding/increase in water level (modeled
as Option 1; probability = 0.01) will set the system back to marsh (class A). Minor flooding/increase in water
level (modeled as Option 2; probability = 0.02) will set the system back to wet meadow (class C).
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
NA
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Native Grazing
Wind/Weather/Stress
Competition
Other (optional 1) increase water
table/flooding
Other (optional 2) decreased water table
References
DeVelice, R.L., Hubbard, C.J., Boggs, K. et al. 1999. Plant community types of the Chugach National
Forest. Tech. Publ. R10-TP-76. Juneau, AK: USDA Forest Service, Alaska Region. 375 pp.
Gracz, M., Noyes, K, North, P. and Tande, G. 2005 Wetland Mapping and Classification of the Kenai
Lowland, Alaska. http://www.kenaiwetlands.net/
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 113 of 204
Jorgenson, M.T. et al. 2003. An ecological land survey for Fort Richardson, Alaska. Cold Regions Research
and Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, New Hampshire, ERDC/CRREL TR-03019.
National Wetlands Working Group. 1997. Wetlands of Canada. C.D.A Rubec (ed.). Ecological Land
Classification Series No. 24. Environment Canada, Ottawa, and Polyscience Publications Inc., Montreal.
452 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 114 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316211
Western North American Boreal Black
Spruce Dwarf-tree Peatland - Boreal Complex
This BPS is lumped with: see below
This BPS is split into multiple models: This system was created by merging several Ecological Systems: Western North
American Boreal Black Spruce Dwarf-tree Peatland, Western North American
Boreal Freshwater Emergent Marsh, Western North American Boreal Wet
Meadow, Western North American Boreal Low Shrub Peatland and Western
North American Boreal Black Spruce-Tamarack Fen
Western North American Boreal Black Spruce-Tamarack Fen is lumped with
Western North American Boreal Black Spruce Dwarf-tree Peatland because it
occurs on similar sites and has a similar successional trajectory. The main
difference is that the late seral stage would be dominated by Larix laricina but
this is accounted for in the model by including both Picea mariana and Larix
laricina in the later seral stage.
Western North American Boreal Freshwater Emergent Marsh, Western North
American Boreal Wet Meadow and Western North American Boreal Low Shrub
Peatland are lumped as successional stages of this model when they occur on
sites with permafrost dynamics. These three systems are also lumped into the Subboreal Fen Complex model where they occur on non-permafrost sites in the
boreal or sub-boreal regions.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Date
4/4/2008
Modeler 1 Jill Johnstone
jill.johnstone@usask.ca
Reviewer Michelle Schuman michelle.schuman@a
Modeler 2 Torre Jorgenson
tjorgenson@abrinc.com
Reviewer Lisa Saperstein
Modeler 3
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Wetlands/Riparian
Dominant Species*
PIMA
LALA
SALIX
BENA
k.usda.gov
Lisa_Saperstein@fws.
gov
General Model Sources
LEGR
MYGA
CAAQ
SPHAG2
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system is found throughout boreal AK, in valley bottoms and broad, poorly drained floodplains (such
as Yukon and Tanana Flats).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 115 of 204
Biophysical Site Description
This sytem is typically found on valley bottoms and toe slopes up to eight percent slope, except on gravel
substrates. Soils are poorly drained and acidic, often with a well-developed peat layer (NatureServe 2008).
Much of this vegetation type is likely to be underlain by near surface permafrost (active layers less than
one meter deep). The presence of permafrost and poor drainage of flat areas work in conjunction to keep
soils cool and wet, restricting decomposition and aiding the accumulation of peat. Warming climates and
deep-burning fires that occur late in the summer have the potential to disrupt the soil thermal regime and
lead to permafrost thawing and subsidence (thermokarst). Thermokarst will lead to prolonged stages of
wetland-marsh type vegetation. Re-establishment of black spruce forests is likely to occur when peatreaccumulates and the permafrost develops again, leading to a rising of the surface above the water table.
Vegetation Description
Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce forests are typically open and trees are generally stunted. Tree rooting
zones are typically within the organic layer, with low nutrient availability and low rates of growth.
Forests will tend to be open and stunted compared to adjacent, more well-drained areas.
Common species include Picea mariana, Ledum groenlandicum, L. palustre ssp. decumbens, Betula nana,
B. glandulosa, Empetrum nigrum, Vaccinium vitis-idaea, V. uliginosum, Chamaedaphne calyculata,
Myrica gale, Carex spp., Eriophorum angustifolium, Menyanthes trifoliata and Sphagnum spp.
(NatureServe 2008). Larix laricina may be locally abundant, particularly on less acidic sites.
Disturbance Description
Fire and thermokarst are the most important processes influencing Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce.
Fire return intervals for this type generally range from 80-130yrs (this is a best guess).
For the VDDT model, it was assumed that fire would occur on the less frequent end of the range provided
above because the presence of moist surface fuel and the open forest canopy associated with this BpS
would limit fire spread and therefore decrease the probability of any particular patch burning.
Thermokarst processes play a key role in shaping the system, but the number of possible pathways and the
time scale at which they operate are beyond the limit of what can be modeled with VDDT. As a result, this
model has been simplified and limited in scope. This model includes Western North American Boreal
Freshwater Emergent Marsh, Western North American Boreal Wet Meadow and Western North American
Boreal Low Shrub Peatland as seral stages in the Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce system. These four
classes are linked by thermokarst processes, as well as by fire dynamics. Boreal Freshwater Emergent
Marsh may maintain itself on the landscape for decades, but on sites where permafrost development is
likely and under appropriate hydrologic conditions, it may begin to dry out, develop an organic layer, and
succeed to Boreal Wet Meadow. In this class, permafrost development begins, as mosses and organic
material accumulate. This stage will succeed to Boreal Wet Low Shrub in the absence of disturbance, and
permafrost and peat development will continue. In the absence of disturbance, trees will eventually begin
to invade, and around age 75yrs, Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce or Black Spruce-Tamarack Fen will
appear.
In any of the three stages with permafrost, there is a low probability (modeled as 0.001) that permafrost
melting will set the system back to the Freshwater Emergent Marsh class. Fire is also a possibility in the
shrub and forest classes. A severe fire that impacts the peat layer may kill the shrub rootstock, setting the
system back to the Wet Meadow class. If such a fire is followed by flooding (as from permafrost melting),
the system may transition back to the Marsh class. If the fire is less intense, the shrubs may resprout and
recover quickly.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 116 of 204
Although it is outside of the scope of this model, the system just described is part of a larger system
connected by thermokarst dynamics. Under some conditions, the marsh class of this system may develop
into a different type of Wet Meadow, with more bog characteristics, and permafrost may not develop
again. This trajectory leads into the Ericaceous Dwarf Shrub Bog model, which could eventually lead to a
forested bog or Wet Black Spruce-Tussock Woodland. In this forested stage, a permafrost layer would
develop again. Alternatively, the Black Spruce Dwarf-tree Peatland or Black Spruce-Tamarack Fen could
undergo paludification and transition to Boreal Sedge-Dwarf-Shrub Bog system. This can happen when
restricted drainage from permafrost development (on inactive alluvial terraces, for example) leads to the
establishment of Sphagnum spp. Or other peat forming mosses or sedges, and over time, peatland plants
dominate the site.
In either of these pathways, the forested bog or Tussock Black Spruce class has the potential to undergo
permafrost melting and collapse and transition back to marsh. However, these cycles are likely to take
thousands of years and are thus outside the scope of this modeling effort. Other pathways that would take
the system out of this model include melting and impoundment, leading to an open water stage, or
drainage of the marsh stage, leading into a white spruce-Calamagrostis canadensis system.
Another pathway into this system is paludification over thousands of years, which could move a site from
the Boreal and Sub-boreal Fen Complex model into this system.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This type can be found adjacent to Boreal Black Spruce Wet-Mesic Slope Woodland and Boreal Mesic
Black Spruce Forest - Boreal. Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce is typically found on valley bottoms and
toe slopes up to eight percent slope. As the slope increases past eight percent, the vegetation typically
transitions to Mesic Black Spruce Forest or, on north-facing slopes, to Black Spruce Wet-Mesic Slope
Woodland. Well-drained gravel sites may support Mesic Black Spruce Forest, even in low, flat areas.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch (small patch)
Issues/Problems
Because the climate has been warming and drying over recent decades, thermokarst processes have been
accelerating. At the same time, lakes and marshes have been shrinking and drying across the boreal
region in recent decades. Many of the marshes in this region may be relicts of the earky Holocene postglacial period, rather than parts of a stable cycle of disturbance and succession. As a result, the concept of
equilibrium dynamics inherent in this modeling process is difficult to apply to this system. Because
thermokarst processes are accelerating, it was difficult to assign a reference probability to these processes.
Over the past 5000yrs, the probability of thermokarst influencing a given point on the landscape averaged
about 0.000014, compared with approximately 0.0006 in the past 50yrs. Under current climate
conditions, the probability is presumably higher.
Comments
This model was created by Torre Jorgenson and refined by Colleen Ryan based on a more narrowly
focused model created by Jill Johnstone for the Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce system. Jill Johnstone
reviewed the final model for the wetland complex. Information provided by Amy Larsen was used in
developing this model.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 117 of 204
Vegetation Classes
Class A
5%
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
TYLA
CARO6
EQFL
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-20yrs
Freshwater Emergent Marsh.
This class is characterized by herbaceous marsh vegetation such as Typha latifolia, Carex rostrata, C.
aquatilis, C. utriculata, Scirpus validus, Menyanthes trifoliata, Equisetum fluviatile and Eleocharis palustris.
Arctophila fulva becomes more common in the northern boreal region. Floating aquatic vegetation (Nuphar
polysepalum, Potamogeton spp.) may also be present. Water level may fluctuate seasonally or between years,
but is at or above the surface for most of the growing season. Areas of open water are often present seasonally.
Permafrost is absent in the class.
If water levels continue to be high, with frequent large fluctuations, class A may maintain itself for decades. If
the hydrologic regime begins to stabilize and dry, this class may succeed to class B (Wet Meadow) in two
years plus.
Fire is extremely unlikely in this class.
With regular seasonal flooding and high water levels, this class maintains itself. Alternate succession to class
B (probability = 0.12) may occur if water levels stabilize and the site begins to dry.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CACA4
CAAQ
ERAN6
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Tree Size Class
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Distinguish from Class A for mapping by lack
of aquatic plants and open water, presence of
organic mat, mosses, permafrost, and/or
dominance of sedges.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 118 of 204
Description
3-5yrs
Wet Meadow.
This class is characterized by dense sedges with a well-developed organic mat. Common and characteristic
species include Calamagrostis canadensis, Carex aquatilis, C. bigelowii, Eriophorum angustifolium, E.
russeolum, E. vaginatum, Equisetum arvense, Equisetum sylvaticum, Epilobium angustifolium, and the moss
Ceratodon purpureus (Gracz 2005, Jorgenson et al. 1999).
Water levels are more stable in this class than in the Freshwater Emergent Marsh. Soils are saturated at some
point in the growing season but do not have standing water (NatureServe 2008). Permafrost development has
begun in this class, making it subject to thermokarst processes. Fire is very unlikely in this class, due to the
saturated soils.
Succession to class C under typical (drying) conditions. Option 1 (probability = 0.02) represents a stable
hydrologic regime that maintains class B. Option 2 (probability = 0.0006) represents increased water levels
which would cause a transition to class A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
45 %
Mid Development 2 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BENA
LEGR
SALIX
VACCI
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
6-74yrs
Low Shrub Peatland
Dwarf ericaceous, low or tall shrubs dominate this class. Myrica gale and Chamaedaphne calyculata are
among the first shrubs to invade. Presence of sphagnum mosses tends to increase soil acidity which in turn
favors the ericaceous shrubs such as Ledum groenlandicum, L. palustre ssp. Decumbens, Andromeda
polifolia and Vaccinium uliginosum. Other common shrub species include Salix spp., Betula nana (B.
glandulosa) and Empetrum nigrum.
Permafrost is well developed in this class, making it subject to thermokarst processes. Fire is possible in this
class during dry periods.
Succession to class D under typical conditions. Severe replacement fire (MFRI = 175yrs) that burns into the
peat layer will kill the shrubs, causing a transition to class B. Replacement fire followed by a hydrologic
change that increased the water level could cause a transition to class A (probability = 0.0017). Option 2
(probability = 0.0006) represents increased water levels as a result of thermokarst processes which could kill
the existing vegetation causing a transition to class A.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 119 of 204
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
45 %
Late Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIMA
LALA
BENA
MYGA
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Cover
Height
Min
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
75yrs+
Mature wet black spruce forest. Picea mariana or Picea mariana-Larix laricina mix. Trees are generally
stunted and generally pole sized although some achieve the medium (9-21in) size class. The presence of Larix
laricina is associated with higher soil pH. Common understory species include the same shrubs as in class C,
as well as Calamagrostis canadensis, Carex aquatilis, C. bigelowii and sphagnum.
Permafrost is well developed in this class, making it subject to thermokarst processes. The probability of fire is
similar to that in the shrub class because the shrubs carry the fire.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Overall replacement MFRI = 130yrs. Severe replacement fire
(MFRI = 175yrs) will kill the shrubs, causing a transition to class B. Replacement fire followed by a
hydrologic change that increased the water level could cause a transition to class A (probability = 0.0017). A
mixed fire (MFRI = 333yrs) that killed most of the trees and top-killed the shrubs would cause a transition to
class C. Option 2 (probability = 0.0006) represents increased water levels as a result of thermokarst processes
which could kill the existing vegetation causing a transition to class A.
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 120 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
IV
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
133.7
727.7
0.00748
0.00137
113
0.00886
Percent of All Fires
84
16
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Native Grazing
Wind/Weather/Stress
Competition
Other (optional 1) continued high water
level
Other (optional 2) increased water level
(thermokarst processes)
References
Foote, M. Joan. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after fire in the Taiga
of Interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR: USDA Forest Service, Pacific Northwest Forest and
Range Experiment Station. 108 pp.
Gracz, M., Noyes, K, North, P., Tande, G. 2005 Wetland Mapping and Classification of the Kenai
Lowland, Alaska. http://www.kenaiwetlands.net/.
Jorgenson, M.T., J.E. Roth, M. Raynolds, M.D. Smith, W. Lentz, A. Zusi-Cobb and C.H. Racine. 1999. An
ecological land survey for Fort Wainwright, Alaska. U.S. Army Cold Regions Research and Engineering
Laboratory, Hanover, NH. U.S. Army Cold Regions Research Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, NH
CRREL Report 99-9. 83 pp.
Jorgenson, M.T., J.E. Roth, M.D. Smith, S. Schlentner, W. Lentz and E.R. Pullman. 2001. An ecological
land survey for Fort Greely, Alaska. U.S. Army Cold Regions Research and Engineering Laboratory,
Hanover, NH. ERDC/CRREL TR-01-04. 85 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Post, R.A. 1996. Functional profile of black spruce wetlands in Alaska. US EPA, Alaska Operations Office,
Seattle, WA. EPA/910/R-96/006. 170 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 121 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316212
Western North American Boreal Black
Spruce Dwarf-tree Peatland - Alaska Subboreal Complex
This BPS is lumped with: see below
This BPS is split into multiple models: This system was created by merging two Ecological Systems: Western North
American Boreal Black Spruce Dwarf-tree Peatland and Western North American
Boreal Sedge-Dwarf-Shrub Bog
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Torre Jorgenson
Date
4/20/2008
tjorgenson@abrinc.com
Reviewer Michelle Schuman michelle.schuman@a
k.usda.gov
Modeler 2 Colleen Ryan
Modeler 3
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Wetlands/Riparian
Dominant Species*
VAOX
ANPO
VAUL
LEGR
Reviewer
General Model Sources
BENA
EMNI
CAREX
SPHAG2
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs in lowland areas throughout the sub-boreal region of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This system includes hydrologically closed bogs, poor fens and organic-rich black spruce forests. Soils are
poorly drained, acidic and nutrient-poor, often with a well-developed peat layer. Permafrost is generally
absent.
Vegetation Description
Common species include Oxycoccus microcarpus, Andromeda polifolia, Vaccinium uliginosum, Ledum
groenlandicum, Betula nana, Empetrum nigrum, Carex microglochin, C. rotundata, C. rariflora, C.
lasiocarpa,C. limosa, C. livida, C. williamsii, Eriophorum brachyantherum, E. angustifolium and Drosera
spp. Sphagnum spp. are usually abundant in the ground layer (NatureServe 2008).
Disturbance Description
Succession begins for this system in shallow ponds or low-lying wetlands that are hydrologically isolated,
floodplain dynamics (oxbows) or thermokarst. An organic root mat typically develops and is either
anchored to the mineral soil or floating on water such as a pond’s edge. Over time, peat-forming mosses
and sedges may fill in the basin. As the peat layer develops, low and dwarf shrubs become established.
Dwarf trees may establish on the well-developed peat and also around the margin of the peatland. The
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 122 of 204
primary disturbances in this system are changes in hydrology, which can move the system between
successional classes or out of this system.
A common pathway into this system is via permafrost degradation, from the Western North American
Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce Complex or another boreal permafrost system. Permafrost degradation
leading to collapse scars and thaw ponds is a common in boreal Alaska, and studies from the Tanana Flats
show areas of widespread degradation (Racine et al. 1998, Jorgenson et al. 2001a, Jorgenson et al. 2001b,
Jorgenson et al. 2003). Thaw ponds form when ice rich permafrost degrades and collapses forming a
basin. Aquatic plants rapidly colonize the pond. Over time, marsh plants and sphagnum moss invade,
creating peatland conditions. If a collapse scar is isolated, succession follows a bog development model
(this system), whereas in an open hydrologic setting, succession follows a fen development model (causing
a transition out of this system to Alaska Sub-Boreal Fen Complex). Pond systems may become connected
as adjacent permafrost thaws.
Succession to peatlands can also occur through paludification of previously forested landscapes. Restricted
drainage from permafrost development (on inactive alluvial terraces, for example) can lead to the
establishment of Sphagnum spp. or other peat forming mosses or sedges, and overtime, peatland plants
dominate the site.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Compare with Alaska Sub-Boreal Fen Complex. Both of these non-permafrost systems may occur in the
boreal region. The fen system will develop on sites with more open hydrology, while this system will
develop on sites with isolated or closed hydrology. This system occurs on less than one percent of the
boreal landscape.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch (small patch)
Issues/Problems
The rate of thermokarst processes appears to be accelerating rapidly, leading to widespread conversion of
permafrost systems to this system and other non-permafrost wetland systems. Widespread ecosystem
conversion has been documented in the Tanana Flats (Jorgenson et al. 2001b), among other areas. The
altered rates of thermokarst processes make it difficult to create an equilibrium model for this system,
since more land area has entered this system than exited it in recent decades.
Comments
Vegetation Classes
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 123 of 204
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
10 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CAAQ
ERRU2
ERAN6
SPHAG2
Upper
Upper
Upper
Lower
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-49yrs
Subarctic Lowland Bog Meadow/Marsh/Poor Fen.
This early stage may exhibit a variety of herbaceous vegetation, from marsh to sedge meadow to sphagnumdominated poor fen. Common species include sedges (Carex aquatilis, C. rariflora, C. limosa, C. utriculata,
Eriophorum russeolum and E. angustifolium) and Sphagnum spp., sometimes with Calamagrostis canadensis
or Equisetum fluviatile.
This stage could be preceded by an open water or aquatic bed system (not included here because they are
sparsely vegetated).
This class maintains itself in the absence of disturbance or follows an alternate succession pathway
(probability = 0.01) to class B.
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Class B
20 %
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
VAOX
ANPO
VAUL
LEGR
Middle
Upper
Upper
Upper
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
1-299yrs
Sedge Dwarf Shrub Bog.
Common species include Vaccinium oxycoccus, V. uliginosum, Andromeda polifolia, Ledum groenlandicum,
Betula nana, Empetrum nigrum, Carex microglochin, C. rotundata, C. rariflora, C. lasiocarpa, C. limosa,C.
livida, C. williamsii, Eriophorum brachyantherum, E. angustifolium and Drosera spp. Sphagnum spp. are
usually abundant in the ground layer.
Sucession to class C. Hydrological changes that cause a transition back to class A are modeled as Option 1
(probability = 0.001).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 124 of 204
Class C
70 %
Late Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIMA
Cover
Height
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
None
Upper
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
300yrs+
Wet Black Spruce Forest/Forested Bog.
Common species include Picea mariana, Ledum groenlandicum, Betula nana, Empetrum nigrum,
Vaccinium vitis-idaea, V. uliginosum, Chamaedaphne calyculata, Carex spp., Eriophorum angustifolium
and Sphagnum spp.
This class maintains itself in the absence of disturbance. Hydrological changes that cause a transition back to
class A are modeled as Option 1 (probability = 0.001).
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 125 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
NA
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) increased water level
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K., A. Garibaldi, J. Stevens, J. Grunblatt and T. Helt. 2001. Denali National Park and Preserve
Landcover mapping project. Volume 2: Landcover classes and plant associations. Alaska Natural Heritage
Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute, University of Alaska Anchorage, 707 A Street,
Anchorage, AK. 164 pp.
Jorgenson, M.T. et al. 2003. An ecological land survey for Fort Richardson, Alaska. Cold Regions Research
and Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, NH, ERDC/CRREL TR-03019.
Jorgenson, M.T., J.E. Roth, M.D. Smith, S. Schlentner, W. Lentz and E.R. Pullman. 2001a. An ecological
land survey for Fort Greely, Alaska. U.S. Army Cold Regions Research and Engineering Laboratory,
Hanover, NH. ERDC/CRREL TR-01-04. 85 pp.
Jorgenson, M.T., C.H. Racine, J.C. Walters and T.E. Osterkamp. 2001b. Permafrost degradation and
ecological changes associated with a warming climate in central Alaska. Climatic Change 48: 551-579.
Jorgenson, M.T., J.E. Roth, M.K. Raynolds, M.D. Smith, W. Lentz, A.L. Zusi-Cobb and C. H. Racine.
2001c. An ecological land survey for Fort Wainwright, Alaska. U.S. Army Cold Regions Research and
Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, NH. CRREL TR-99-9. 92 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Racine, C.H., Jorgenson, M.T. and Walters, J.C. 1998. Thermokarst vegetation in lowland birch forests on
the Tanana Flats, Interior Alaska, USA. In: Proceedings of the 7th International Conference on Permafrost,
June 23-27, 1998. Universite Laval, Sainte-Foy, Quebec, Collection Nordicana, 57: 927-934.
Zoltai, S.C., Taylor, S., Jeglum, J.K., Mills, G.F. and Johnson, J.D. 1988. Wetlands of Boreal Canada.
Pages 99-154 in: Wetlands of Canada. Ecological Land Classification Series No. 24. Environment Canada,
Ottawa, and Polyscience Publications Inc., Montreal.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 126 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316220
Western North American Boreal Black
Spruce Wet-Mesic Slope Woodland
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Joan Foote
Modeler 2 Colleen Ryan
Modeler 3
Date
joanf@mosquitonet.com Reviewer Michelle Schuman michelle.schuman@a
k.usda.gov
Reviewer Will Putnam
wputman@tananachie
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
fs.org
Reviewer Lisa Saperstein
Lisa_Saperstein@fws.
gov
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Wetlands/Riparian
Dominant Species*
PIMA
LEPAD
VAVI
EMNI
4/18/2008
General Model Sources
VAUL
BENA
SPGI70
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system is found throughout interior boreal AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This BpS is found on north-facing slopes underlain by permafrost. Soils are poorly drained and acidic
with a well-developed peat layer (NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
The dominant overstory vegetation is Picea mariana. Mature trees on these sites are usually smaller than
those on mesic sites. Common shrubs include Ledum groenlandicum, Ledum palustre, Betula nana (this
species here includes B. glandulosa), Empetrum nigrum, Vaccinium vitis-idaea and V. uliginosum
(NatureServe 2008). Herbs include Equisetum sylvaticum, Rubus chamaemorus and Carex spp. (Foote
1983). Older stands will include lichens, especially Cladina arbuscula and C. rangiferina. Mosses include
Sphagnum spp., Pleurozium schreberi and Polytrichum spp. Feathermosses are typical of cooling soils,
which can lead to permafrost development. Sites where permafrost is closer to the surface will have more
sphagnum.
Disturbance Description
Fire is the dominant disturbance mechanism for this forest type. Fire is facilitated by an abundance of fine
fuel and ladder fuel in this type. The overall MFRI for this model is similar to that for Western North
American Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest - Boreal. Despite saturated soils, wet black spruce forest on
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 127 of 204
slopes lacks the standing water that limits fire in wet black spruce flats (Boreal Lowland Wet Black
Spruce Complex). Fires in this forest type are usually fast-moving and patchy. High severity fire may lead
to an increased deciduous tree component (Johnstone and Kasischke 2005).
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This type is intermingled with the Western North American Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest - Boreal
BpS and the Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce Complex BpS. Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce
Complex is found on low flats and concave and toeslope sites. Boreal Black Spruce Wet-Mesic Slope
Woodland is found on north-facing slopes, while Mesic Black Spruce Forest - Boreal is found on upper,
convex slopes of other aspects. In hilly areas, Lowland Wet Black Spruce Complex typically occurs on the
flats and toe slopes up to an eight percent grade (T. Jorgenson, pers. Comm.) Above the eight percent
cutoff will be Boreal Black Spruce Wet-Mesic Slope Woodland on north-facing slopes or Boreal Mesic
Black Spruce Forest - Boreal on other slopes.
This model applies to sites with well-developed peat soils on permafrost. In contrast, mesic black spruce
typically occurs on sites lacking permafrost and peat soils in the southern parts of the Boreal region. North
of Fairbanks, both Boreal Mesic Black Spruce Forest - Boreal and Boreal Lowland Wet Black Spruce
Complex may occur with permafrost.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch (small patch)
Issues/Problems
Comments
Joan Foote and Colleen Ryan drafted this model. Michelle Schuman, Lisa Saperstein and Will Putnam
reviewed an early draft of this model.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
10 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
EQSY
BENA
RUCH
SPGI70
Upper
Middle
Low-Mi
Lower
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Herbs or shrubs can dominate.
Description
0-19yrs
Herbaceous and/or shrub, open or closed. After a fire, herbs and shrubs quickly re-establish on the site. Soon,
the shrubs begin to overtop the herbs. By the end of this class, a closed shrub canopy is present. Spruce
seedlings are present in the understory.
Common shrubs include Ledum groenlandicum, Ledum palustre, Betula nana (syn. B. glandulosa), Empetrum
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 128 of 204
nigrum, Vaccinium vitis-idaea and V. uliginosum. Herbs include Equisetum sylvaticum, Rubus chamaemorus
and Carex spp. Mosses include Sphagnum spp., Pleurozium schreberi and Polytrichum spp. On some sites,
alder and willow may be present.
Fire is unlikely in this class due to lack of fuel and saturated soils. Any fire will be stand-replacing.
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 1000yrs.
Class B
20 %
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
PIMA
RUCH
EMNI
SPGI70
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Height
Tree Size Class
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Mid-Upper
Low-Mid
Low-Mid
Lower
Tree (> 3 m)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, if this class can not be be
distinguished from class C and D by existing
vegetation type (Black Spruce Scrub and
Shrub Swamp), class B can be considered a
dwarf tree class.
Description
20-40yrs
Black spruce, open or closed, seedling/sapling. This class is dominated by black spruce saplings and shrubs.
Early in this stage, the tree seedlings begin to overtop the low shrubs. By the end of this class, the trees will
overtop the tall shrubs (willow and/or alder), if present. The end of this class will be a closed stand of spruce
saplings. In some cases, this class may include older black spruce trees that have survived a mixed fire.
Succession to class C is the primary pathway, which is followed by closed stands. If this class is open, it will
succeed to class D, represented in the model by alternate succession (probability = 0.03). Replacement MFRI
= 170yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 170yrs) maintains the system in class B.
Class C
35 %
Late Development 1 Closed
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIMA
RUCH
EMNI
SPGI70
Upper
Low-Mid
Low-Mid
Lower
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
40yrs+
Black spruce, closed. This class is dominated by relatively dense sapling to pole-sized Picea mariana,
typically in even-aged stands. Trees will typically range from 2.5-10cm DBH and 2-7m tall (Foote 1983).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 129 of 204
However, uneven aged stands may occur where some individuals have survived an earlier mixed fire. The
canopy is nearly 100% spruce.
This is typically the most flammable class because of the pulses of fuel created by the die-off of overtopped
shrubs around age 40-60yrs. Abundant snags, dead lower branches and fine fuel also increase the likelihood
of fire in this class. Mixed fire in this class will transition the system to class B, creating patches of mature
trees in a matrix of shrubs, with spruce regeneration in the understory.
This class will persist in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 125yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI =
110yrs) causes a transition to class B.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
35 %
Late Development 2 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIMA
PLSC70
CLADI3
SPGI70
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Min
Max
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Height
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
40yrs+
Black spruce/lichen, open. Open canopy mature Picea mariana, with feathermoss and lichen. Mosses and
lichens expand with age, as the leaf litter from the shrubs disappears. In this class, the canopy has begun to
open up and lichen development has begun. Lichen species include Cladina arbuscula, C. rangiferina and
Nephroma articum. Mosses include Pleurozium schreberi, Polytrichum spp., Hylocomium splendens and
Dicranum spp, as well as Sphagnum spp. Low shrubs, including Vaccinium vitis-idaea, V. uliginosum and
Ledum groenlandicum, are often present in the understory.
Any fire in this class will kill the lichens. Mixed fire will transition the system to class B, creating patches of
mature trees in a matrix of shrubs, with spruce regeneration in the understory.
This class will persist in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 170yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI =
110yrs) causes a transition to class B.
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 130 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
III
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
163.9
140.8
0.0061
0.0071
76
0.01321
Percent of All Fires
46
54
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Foote, M. Joan. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after fire in the Taiga
of Interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR: USDA Forest Service, Pacific Northwest Forest and
Range Experiment Station. 108 pp.
Johnstone, J.F. and E.S. Kasischke. 2005. Stand-level effects of soil burn severity on post-fire regeneration
in a recently-burned black spruce forest. Canadian Journal of Forest Research 35: 2151-2163.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 131 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316240
Western North American Boreal Deciduous
Shrub Swamp
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Date
4/24/2008
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Reviewer Michelle Schuman michelle.schuman@a
Modeler 2 Colleen Ryan
Modeler 3
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
Reviewer
k.usda.gov
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Wetlands/Riparian
Dominant Species*
General Model Sources
ALINT
CACA4
ALVIS
EQUIS
SAPU15
SARI4
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This BpS occurs throughout the boreal and sub-boreal regions of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
Shrub swamps occur on poorly drained fine textured soil in lowland areas or depressions that retain
standing water throughout all or most of the growing season (NatureServe 2008; Viereck et al. 1992).
Soils range from muck to mineral (does not include peatlands; NatureServe 2008).
This system tends to occur in transition zones between peatlands and forest systems. Specific locations
may shift over time.
Vegetation Description
Deciduous shrub swamps are usually dominated by alders, but willows or an alder/willow mix also occur
(Viereck et al. 1992). Common species include Alnus incana ssp. tenuifolia, Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata,
Salix pulchra, Salix richardsonii, Calamagrostis canadensis, Equisetum spp., Potentilla palustris
(Comarum palustre) and hydrophytic mosses (Viereck et al. 1992).
Though this system is classified as closed by Viereck, et al. (1992), it may also occur in an open form.
Disturbance Description
Shrub swamps likely represent a topoedaphic climax community which will persist as long as the
hydrologic conditions supporting them are maintained (Viereck et al. 1992). Some sites may move back
and forth between this system and peatlands, forest, or even open water as hydrology changes, but these
transitions are not directional, and are generally outside of the time scale of this model.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 132 of 204
This system typically acts as a fire break, but it could burn under drought conditions and severe fire
behavior. When fire occurs, it is likely to be replacement fire. Alder may resprout following fire, allowing
recovery to this system. Alternatively, fire may cause changes in hydrology that could transition the site
out of this system, possibly toward an open water condition. Replacement fire that regenerated this system
is estimated at a MFRI of 500yrs.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Typically small patch, but some large patches occur, especially in the Tanana Flats area.
Issues/Problems
Comments
Addition of an early herb stage was considered, but it is believed that shrubs typically recover quickly from
fire. Flooding was not included as a disturbance because the dominant species are flood-tolerant. Flooding
severe or prolonged enough to kill the shrubs is likely to cause a transition out of this system.
Suggested reviewers for this system include: Al Batten, Torre Jorgenson and Katie Ireland.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
100 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
ALINT
ALVIS
SAPU15
SARI4
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
Alpine Herbaceous-Dwarf Shrub communities may include a diverse mix of species and species assemblages.
The class Indicator Species listed are not true indicators -- refer to the Vegetation Description for species
information.
No disturbances modeled.
Open to closed tall shrub swamp. The shrub canopy is commonly 3-5m tall (Viereck et al. 1992). Overstory is
typically dominated by alder, willow or an alder/willow mix. Common overstory species include Alnus incana
ssp. Tenuifolia, Alnus viridis ssp. Sinuata, Salix pulchra and S. lanata. Understory can include Calamagrostis
canadensis, Equisetum spp., Potentilla palustris (Comarum palustre) and hydrophytic mosses.
This class persists indefinitely under appropriate hydrological conditions. Replacement fire (MFRI = 500yrs)
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 133 of 204
will reset the class to age zero as shrubs resprout.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Shrub
Tree
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 134 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
496.1
0.00202
496
0.00204
Percent of All Fires
99
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Batten, Alan R., S. Murphy and D.F. Murray. 1978. Definition of Alaskan coastal
wetlands by floristic criteria. Corvallis, OR: Corvallis Environmental Research Laboratory; EPA 80496501. 490 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck, L.A., Dyrness, C.T., Batten, A.R. and Wenzlick, K.J. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification.
Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286.
278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 135 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316280
Western North American Boreal Low ShrubTussock Tundra
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Jennifer Allen
4/4/2008
Jennifer_Allen@nps.go
v
Reviewer Lisa Saperstein
Reviewer Stuart Chapin
Reviewer
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Upland Shrubland
Dominant Species*
ERVA4
CABI5
BENA
SAPU15
Date
General Model Sources
LEPAD
VACCI
CACA4
ARCTA
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Lisa_Saperstein@fws.
gov
fffsc@uaf.edu
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This BpS occurs in the boreal and the northern section of the sub-boreal region of AK. It is found on
lowland to subalpine sites.
Biophysical Site Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
Permafrost is usually present at depths of 30-50cm. Soils are generally acidic, poorly drained, gleyed, and
often with a poorly decomposed organic horizon at the surface, which may constitute most of the active
layer. Frost scars are common. Tussock communities occur on gentle slopes, terraces, and old alluvial
deposits. Sites are often underlain by silty mineral soils with a surface peat layer 10-40 cm thick
surrounding the tussocks (Viereck et al 1992).
Vegetation Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
Boreal Low Shrub-Tussock Tundra is a common lowland system dominated by tussock sedges and low
shrubs. Eriophorum vaginatum is the primary tussock-former in most stands, but Carex bigelowii may be
the dominant tussock sedge on some sites. Other indicator species include Betula nana (includes B.
glandulosa), Salix pulchra, Ledum decumbens (Ledum palustre L. ssp. decumbens), Vaccinium vitisidaea, V. uliginosum, Empetrum nigrum and Carex spp. Grasses, including Calamagrostis canadensis
and Arctagrostis spp., may also be present. Lichens are scarce (with the possible exception of Peltigera
canina).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 136 of 204
Disturbance Description
The fuel layer in sedge-shrub tussock tundra is dense and continuous and leads to large, fast spreading
fires (Duchesne and Hawkes 2000, Racine et al 1987). Racine (1979) found much variation in burn
intensity on a landscape scale on the Seward Peninsula, from completely unburned to intensely burned.
These patterns are related to variations in topography and the composition, moisture content and soil
organic accumulations of the plant communities. Fires in Eriophorum tussock tundra types tend to be light
because of the wet soil profile (Wein 1971). Burns in this type usually consume all aerial woody and
herbaceous plant material and litter; regeneration is vigorous via rhizomes and root sprouts. Racine (1979)
found that burning was generally less severe in the tussock-shrub and sedge-shrub tundras than in the
birch and ericaceous shrub tundra of the Seward Peninsula. He found that tundra burns were patchy, with
unburned communities and unburned patches within burned communities.
More fires occur near the forest-tundra ecotone and spread further if trees are present (Heinselman 1981).
Wein (1976) reports that July and August are the most common months for lightning fires in tundra
ecosystems, while Racine et al (1983, 1985) found that distinct fire seasons occur in both June and July in
the Noatak River watershed. Subsidence and thermal erosion following fire is usually minimal in tundra
ecosystems (Walker 1996).
In most areas of tussock-shrub tundra on the Seward Peninsula, less than one half of accumulated organic
soil layer was removed by fire (Racine 1979). Thaw depths increased to reach into the mineral soils, but
were not greatly increased except where organics were removed. Frost features were made more
conspicuous, and soil nutrient concentrations (K and P) increased locally.
Mean fire return interval estimates for tussock tundra ecosystems include:
-50-300yrs (personal communication FRCC experts’ workshop March 2004)
-260yr (s.d. 170) fire return interval for past 1500yrs for Noatak National Preserve (preliminary data from
Higuera et al. 2008)
-180-1460yrs in forest shrubzone and 9320yrs in shrub subzone in northern Quebec; shorter cycle west of
Hudson’s Bay/in interior zone (Payette et al 1989)
-612yrs for Noatak River watershed (all vegetation types) (Racine et al 1983)
-611yr fire rotation for Noatak River watershed (all vegetation below 600m which is predominantly
tundra) (Racine et al 1985)
-Fire interval yet to be determined (Racine et al 1987)
-Rapid recovery following fire makes fire frequency difficult to determine (Wein 1971)
-The fire regime of tundra systems are likely quite variable from one region to another making
generalizations difficult (Viereck and Schandelmeier 1980)
On interior and southcentral Alaska Tussock Tundra sites the thaw pond cycle (disturbance leads to
thawing of permafrost and ponding) and paludification (Sphagnum layer buildup and saturation) are
important disturbances. On the Seward Peninsula and western AK, frost action creates polygonal ground
and other periglacial features and is a widespread, small-scale and continuous disturbance.
Change in the arctic and subarctic climate is another source of disturbance that is currently affecting
tundra ecosystems.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
The Boreal Low Shrub-Tussock Tundra is similar to the Arctic Tussock Low Shrub Tundra system (and
the Tussock Tundra 2 PNV) that occurs in AK’s arctic and has a longer mean fire return interval
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 137 of 204
(NatureServe 2008). Geographic location is the best determinant between these two systems.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Vegetation found in large patches
Wien (1976) reports many tundra fires in the 1-100ha size range and few large (thousands of ha) fires.
Racine (1979) reports that in 1977, lightning-caused fires burned 35,480ha on the Seward Peninsula, with
one fire burning 9440ha. Jandt and Meyers (2000) report that large fires (>200,000ha) occur about every
10yrs in the Buckland Valley and surrounding highlands of the Seward Peninsula. Racine et al (1983)
found that 40 fires burned 100,000ha (1000km2) in the 30,000km2 watershed of the Noatak River
between 1956 and 1981. Racine et al (1985) found a minimum fire size of 0.4ha, a maximum fire size of
45,800ha and a mean fire size of 1310ha from 1956-1983 in the Noatak River watershed, an area
dominated by tundra vegetation. Of the 79 fires in analyzed by Racine et al (1985), nearly half were
between 1-10ha in size. Forty-three percent of wildland fires occurring in interior Alaska occur in treeless
areas, primarily tundra bogs and fens (Viereck 1975).
Issues/Problems
Comments
This model was based on the FRCC Guidebook PNVG model for Tussock Tundra 1 (TT1; Murphy and
Witten 2006) and input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07) modeling
meeting and was refined by Jennifer Allen. Much of the text in the Disturbance Description and Scale
Description portion of this report were taken from the TT1 description (Murphy and Witten 2006).
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
10 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
ERVA4
CABI5
CACA4
ARCTA
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-14yrs
Mesic herbaceous-graminoid-tussock-sedge. First year following fire Eriophorum (cottongrass) and Carex spp.
(sedges) regrow via rhizomes, most vascular species begin to recover, shrubs sprout from rootstock. Sedges
often capture site 6-10yrs post fire. Grasses (Calamagrostis and Arctagrostis) are locally important following
fire.
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 175yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 138 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
75 %
Mid Development 1 Closed
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BENA
SALIX
ERVA4
CABI5
Shrub
Tree
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Classes B and C should be mapped based on
EVT if possible. Class B is represented by
Mixed Shrub-Sedge Tussock Tundra/Bog and
class C by tussock-shrub-lichen. If these types
are not mapped, B can be considered a low
shrub class and C a dwarf shrub class for
mapping.
Description
15yrs+
Low shrub-tussock. Tussocks dominated by Eriophorum (cottongrass), Carex spp. (sedges). Common shrub
species include Betula nana, Salix spp. and Vaccinium uliginosum. Lichens begin to re-establish but do not
reach former abundance until 50-120yrs following fire. Fire is difficult to detect even in the early stages of
this class; however, the proportions of species differ from the pre-burn community, with very few lichens,
fewer shrubs and more sedges, grasses and cottongrass. Former abundances of all species are typically
reached 50-120yrs post fire. Lichens, if present, have <25% cover.
This class can persist in the absence of disturbance or follow an alternate succession pathway to class C
(probability = 0.001). Replacement MFRI = 175yrs causes transition to class A.
Mid Development 1 Open
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Class C
15 %
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BENA
SALIX
ERVA4
PECA60
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Classes B and C should be mapped based on
EVT if possible. Class B is represented by
Mixed Shrub-Sedge Tussock Tundra/Bog and
class C by tussock-shrub-lichen. If these types
are not mapped, B can be considered a low
shrub class and C a dwarf shrub class for
mapping.
Description
80yrs+
Dwarf shrub-lichen-tussock. Tussocks are dominated by shrubs and lichens. Species composition is similar
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 139 of 204
to that in class B, but lichen cover is >25%.
This class can persist in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 200yrs causes transition to class
A. Mixed fire (MFRI = 2000yrs) maintains this class.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
IV
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
180
9999
0.00556
0.00010
177
0.00567
Percent of All Fires
98
2
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Duchesne L.C. and B.C. Hawkes. 2000. Fire in northern ecosystems. In: Brown, J.K. and J.K. Smith (eds.)
Wildland fire in ecosystems: effects of fire on flora. Gen. Tech. Rep. RMRS-GTR-42-vol 2. Ogden, UT:
USDA Forest Service, Rocky Mountain Research Station. 257 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 140 of 204
Heinselman, M.L. 1981. Fire and succession in the conifer forests of northern North America. In: West,
D.C., H.H. Shugart, and D.B. Botkin. Forest succession: concepts and application. Springer-Verlag, New
York. Chapter 23.
Higuera, P.E., M. Chipman, J. Allen, S. Rupp and F.S. Hu. 2008. Preliminary data provided by Jenifer
Allen from a study of tundra fire regimes in the Noatak National Preserve since 6000 years before present.
Jandt, R.J. and R.C. Meyers. 2000. Recovery of lichen in tussock tundra following fire in Northwestern
Alaska. USDOI BLM-Alaska Open File Report 82.
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Tussock Tundra 1. In Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Payette, S., C. Morneau, L. Sirois and M. Desponts. 1989. Recent fire history of the northern Quebec
biomes. Ecology. 70: 656-673.
Personal communication experts’ workshop, March 2-4 2004. Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
interagency experts’ workshop to develop and review Potential Natural Vegetation (PNV) groups for
Alaska. Anchorage, AK.
Racine, C.H., L.A. Johnson and L.A. Viereck. 1987. Patterns of vegetation recovery after tundra fires in
northwestern Alaska, USA. Arctic and Alpine Research. 19: 461-469.
Racine. 1979. Climate of the Chucki-Imuruk area. Pages 32-37 in H. R. Melchior, ed., Biological Survey of
the Bering Land Bridge National Monument. Alaska Cooperative Park Studies Unit, University of Alaska
Fairbanks, Fairbanks, AK.
Racine, C. H., W. A. Patterson III, and J. G. Dennis. 1983. Permafrost thaw associated with tundra fires in
northwest Alaska. Pages 1024-1029 in Proceedings, Permafrost, Fourth International Conference. National
Academy Press, Washington, D.C.
Racine, C.H., J.G. Dennis and W.A. Patterson III. 1985. Tundra fire regimes in the Noatak River
Watershed, Alaska: 1956-83. Arctic 38:194-200.
Racine, C., J.L. Allen and J.G. Dennis. 2006. Long-term monitoring of vegetation change following tundra
fires in Noatak National Preserve, Alaska. Arctic Network of Parks inventory and monitoring program,
National Park Service, Alaksa Region. Report no. NPS/AKRARCN/NRTR-2006/02.
Viereck, L.A. 1975. Forest ecology of the Alaska Taiga. In: Proceedings of the circumpolar conference on
northern ecology; 1975 September; Ottawa, ON. National Research Council of Canada: I-1 to I-22.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
Viereck, L.A. and Schandelmeier, L.A. 1980. Effects of fire in Alaska and adjacent Canada--a literature
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 141 of 204
review. BLM-Aalska Tech. Rep. No. 6. Anchorage, Alaska: U.S. Department of the Interior, Bureau of
Land Management. 124 pp.
Walker, D.A. 1996. Disturbance and Recovery of Arctic Alaskan Vegetation. In: J.F. Reynolds and J.D.
Tenhunen eds, Landscape function and disturbance in arctic tundra. Ecological studies vol. 120, Springer
Verlag Berlin Heidleberg.
Wein, R.W. 1971. Panel discussion: In: Slaughter, C.W., Barney, Richard J. and Hansen, G.M. (editors).
1971. Fire in the Northern Environment – A Symposium. Sponsors: Alaska Forest Fire Counc il and
Society of American Foresters. Held at: The University of Alaska, Fairbanks. April 13-14, 1971. Published
by: Pacific.
Wein, R.W. 1976. Frequency and characteristics of arctic tundra fires. Arctic 29: 213-222.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 142 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316290
Western North American Boreal Tussock
Tundra
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Jennifer Allen
4/4/2008
Jennifer_Allen@nps.go
v
Reviewer Lisa Saperstein
Reviewer Stuart Chapin
Reviewer
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
Vegetation Type
Upland Grassland/Herbaceous
Dominant Species*
ERVA4
CABI5
VAOX
CHCA2
Date
General Model Sources
BENA
LEPAD
SPHAG2
PLSC70
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Map Zone
73
Lisa_Saperstein@fws.
gov
fffsc@uaf.edu
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This BpS occurs in the boreal and the northern section of sub-boreal region of AK. It is found on lowland
to subalpine sites.
Biophysical Site Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
Permafrost is usually present at depths of 30-50cm. Soils are generally poorly drained, gleyed, and often
with a poorly decomposed organic horizon at the surface, which may constitute most of the active layer.
Frost scars are common. Tussock bog communities occur on lowlands of boreal and boreal transition
Alaska, on filled-in sloughs on flood plains and on cold, poorly drained slopes and terraces. These sites
are underlain by wet, silty mineral soils with a surface peat layer 10-40cm thick surrounding the tussocks
(Viereck et al 1992).
Vegetation Description
The following information was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems description (NatureServe
2008):
Boreal Tussock Tundra is dominated by sedges in a tussock growth form. Eriophorum vaginatum is the
primary tussock-former in most stands and Carex bigelowii is also common. On wetter sites, Oxycoccus
spp. (Vaccinium oxycoccos) and Chamaedaphne calyculata may be present. Total shrub cover is <25%,
although shrubs such as Betula nana (including B. glandulosa), Ledum decumbens (Ledum palustre L.
ssp. decumbens) and Vaccinium spp. may be present. Mosses (Sphagnum spp., Pleurozium schreberi,
Hylocomium splendens) may form a nearly continuous mat between tussocks. Lichens may be a
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 143 of 204
significant component on some sites.
Disturbance Description
The fuel layer in sedge-shrub tussock tundra is dense and continuous and leads to large, fast spreading
fires (Duchesne and Hawkes 2000, Racine et al 1987). Racine (1979) found much variation in burn
intensity on a landscape scale on the Seward Peninsula, from completely unburned to intensely burned.
These patterns are related to variations in topography and the composition, moisture content and soil
organic accumulations of the plant communities. Fires in Eriophorum tussock tundra types tend to be light
because of the wet soil profile (Wein 1971). Burns in this type usually consume all aerial woody and
herbaceous plant material and litter; regeneration is vigorous via rhizomes and root sprouts. Racine (1979)
found that burning was generally less severe in the tussock-shrub and sedge-shrub tundras than in the
birch and ericaceous shrub tundra of the Seward Peninsula. He found that tundra burns were patchy, with
unburned communities and unburned patches within burned communities.
More fires occur near the forest-tundra ecotone and spread further if trees are present (Heinselman 1981).
Wein (1976) reports that July and August are the most common months for lightning fires in tundra
ecosystems, while Racine et al (1983; 1985) found that distinct fire seasons occur in both June and July in
the Noatak River watershed. Subsidence and thermal erosion following fire is usually minimal in tundra
ecosystems (Walker 1996).
In most areas of tussock-shrub tundra on the Seward Peninsula, less than one half of accumulated organic
soil layer was removed by fire (Racine 1979). Thaw depths increased to reach into the mineral soils, but
were not greatly increased except where organics were removed. Frost features were made more
conspicuous, and soil nutrient concentrations (K and P) increased locally.
Mean fire return interval estimates for tussock tundra ecosystems include:
-50-300yrs (personal communication FRCC experts’ workshop March 2004)
-260yr (s.d. 170) fire return interval for past 1500yrs for Noatak National Preserve (preliminary data from
Higuera et al. 2008)
-180-1460yrs in forest shrubzone and 9,320yrs in shrub subzone in northern Quebec; shorter cycle west of
Hudson’s Bay/in interior zone (Payette et al 1989)
-612yrs for Noatak River watershed (all vegetation types) (Racine et al 1983)
-611yr fire rotation for Noatak River watershed (all vegetation below 600m which is predominantly
tundra) (Racine et al 1985)
-Fire interval yet to be determined (Racine et al 1987)
-Rapid recovery following fire makes fire frequency difficult to determine (Wein 1971)
-The fire regime of tundra systems are likely quite variable from one region to another making
generalizations difficult (Viereck and Schandelmeier 1980)
On interior and southcentral Alaska Tussock Tundra sites the thaw pond cycle (disturbance leads to
thawing of permafrost and ponding) and paludification (sphagnum layer buildup and saturation) are
important disturbances. On the Seward Peninsula and western AK, frost action creates polygonal ground
and other periglacial features and is a widespread, small-scale and continuous disturbance.
Change in the arctic and subarctic climate is another source of disturbance that is currently affecting
tundra ecosystems.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 144 of 204
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Vegetation found in large patches
Wien (1976) reports many tundra fires in the 1-100ha size range and few large (thousands of ha) fires.
Racine (1979) reports that in 1977, lightning-caused fires burned 35,480ha on the Seward Peninsula, with
one fire burning 9440ha. Jandt and Meyers (2000) report that large fires (>200,000ha) occur about every
10yrs in the Buckland Valley and surrounding highlands of the Seward Peninsula. Racine et al (1983)
found that 40 fires burned 100,000ha (1000km2) in the 30,000km2 watershed of the Noatak River
between 1956 and 1981. Racine et al (1985) found a minimum fire size of 0.4ha, a maximum fire size of
45,800ha and a mean fire size of 1310ha from 1956-1983 in the Noatak River watershed, an area
dominated by tundra vegetation. Of the 79 fires in analyzed by Racine et al (1985), nearly half were
between 1-10ha in size. Forty-three percent of wildland fires occurring in interior Alaska occur in treeless
areas, primarily tundra bogs and fens (Viereck 1975).
Issues/Problems
Experts at the Fairbanks meeting indicated the need for a late seral sphagnum tussock bog stage that
would develop as a result of paludification in class B. The VDDT model does not include that stage
because it would be hard to distinguish for mapping using LANDFIRE methods.
This model is based in part on data from the Seward Peninsula, which is not part of the boreal region. In
particular, much of the data on fire regimes comes from the Seward and Noatak areas, both of which are
part of the arctic region.
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07)
modeling meeting and refined by Jennifer Allen. Much of the text in the Disturbance Description, Scale
Description and Succession Class Descriptions in this report were taken from the Tussock Tundra 1
PNVG model description (Murphy and Witten 2006).
This model was origioanlly developed with two herbaceous classes: a Mesic Graminoid Tussock and a Wet
Graminoid Tussock class. When it was determined that the LANDFIRE project would not be able to
distingusish these classes using a Viereck et al. (1992) based existing vegetation map, these two classes
were lumped into what is now class A.
Vegetation Classes
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 145 of 204
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
85 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
ERVA4
CABI5
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
Mesic graminoid tussocks dominates for the first 10yrs or longer. First year following fire Eriophorum
(cottongrass) and Carex spp. (sedges) regrow via rhizomes, most vascular species begin to recover, shrubs
sprout from rootstock. Sedges often capture site 6-10yrs post fire. Grasses (Calamagrostis and Arctagrostis)
are locally important following fire. A high severity fire can lead to increased shrub development (class C),
whereas a low to moderate severity fire typically leads to the development of a wet graminoid tussock stage.
Wet graminoid tussock can dominate some sites developing about 10yrs post fire. It is the most common stage
after a low to moderate severity fire. Over time paludification results in the development of a sphagnum
tussock bog (the model does not include the sphagnum tussock bog stage because it would be hard to
distinguish for mapping using LANDFIRE methods).
This class persists in the absence of disturbance or will follow an alternate successional pathway to class B
(probability = 0.001). Replacement MFRI = 175yrs.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
15 %
Late Development 1 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CHCA2
VAOX
ERVA4
CABI5
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
None
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
10yrs+
Dwarf shrub, tussock. Most common stage after a high severity fire. Tussocks dominated by Eriophorum
(cottongrass), Carex spp. (sedges). Common shrubs include Oxycoccus spp. (Vaccinium oxycoccus),
Chamaedaphne calyculata, Betula nana, Ledum decumbens and Vaccinium. Lichens begin to re-establish but
do not reach former abundance until 50-120yrs following fire. Fire is difficult to detect even in the early
stages of this class, however the proportions of species differs from the pre-burn community, with very few
lichens, fewer shrubs and more sedges, grasses and cottongrass. Former abundances of all species are
typically reached 50-120yrs post fire.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 175yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 146 of 204
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
IV
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Fire Intervals
Replacement
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
175
0.00571
175
0.00573
Percent of All Fires
100
Mixed
Surface
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 147 of 204
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Duchesne L.C. and B.C. Hawkes. 2000. Fire in northern ecosystems. In: Brown, J.K. and J.K. Smith (eds.)
Wildland fire in ecosystems: effects of fire on flora. Gen. Tech. Rep. RMRS-GTR-42-vol 2. Ogden, UT:
USDA Forest Service, Rocky Mountain Research Station. 257 pp.
Heinselman, M.L. 1981. Fire and succession in the conifer forests of northern North America. In: West,
D.C., H.H. Shugart, and D.B. Botkin. Forest succession: concepts and application. Springer-Verlag, New
York. Chapter 23.
Higuera, P.E., M. Chipman, J. Allen, S. Rupp and F.S. Hu. 2008. Preliminary data provided by Jenifer
Allen from a study of tundra fire regimes in the Noatak National Preserve since 6000 years before present.
Jandt, R.J. and R.C. Meyers. 2000. Recovery of lichen in tussock tundra following fire in Northwestern
Alaska. USDOI BLM-Alaska Open File Report 82.
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Tussock Tundra 1. In Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Payette, S., C. Morneau, L. Sirois and M. Desponts. 1989. Recent fire history of the northern Quebec
biomes. Ecology. 70:656-673.
Personal communication experts’ workshop, March 2-4 2004. Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
interagency experts’ workshop to develop and review Potential Natural Vegetation (PNV) groups for
Alaska. Anchorage, AK.
Racine, C.H., L.A. Johnson and L.A. Viereck. 1987. Patterns of vegetation recovery after tundra fires in
northwestern Alaska, USA. Arctic and Alpine Research. 19: 461-469.
Racine. 1979. Climate of the Chucki-Imuruk area. Pages 32-37 in H. R. Melchior, ed., Biological Survey of
the Bering Land Bridge National Monument. Alaska Cooperative Park Studies Unit, University of Alaska
Fairbanks, Fairbanks, AK.
Racine, C.H., W.A. Patterson III and J.G. Dennis. 1983. Permafrost thaw associated with tundra fires in
northwest Alaska. Pages 1024-1029 in Proceedings, Permafrost, Fourth International Conference. National
Academy Press, Washington, D.C.
Racine, C.H., J.G. Dennis and W.A. Patterson III. 1985. Tundra fire regimes in the Noatak River
Watershed, Alaska: 1956-83. Arctic 38: 194-200.
Racine, C., J.L. Allen and J.G. Dennis. 2006. Long-term monitoring of vegetation change following tundra
fires in Noatak National Preserve, Alaska. Arctic Network of Parks inventory and monitoring program,
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 148 of 204
National Park Service, Alaksa Region. Report no. NPS/AKRARCN/NRTR-2006/02.
Viereck, L.A. 1975. Forest ecology of the Alaska Taiga. In: Proceedings of the circumpolar conference on
northern ecology; 1975 September; Ottawa, ON. National Research Council of Canada: I-1 to I-22.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
Viereck, L.A. and Schandelmeier, L.A. 1980. Effects of fire in Alaska and adjacent Canada--a literature
review. BLM-Aalska Tech. Rep. No. 6. Anchorage, Alaska: U.S. Department of the Interior, Bureau of
Land Management. 124 pp.
Walker, D.A. 1996. Disturbance and Recovery of Arctic Alaskan Vegetation. In: JF Reynolds and JD
Tenhunen eds, Landscape function and disturbance in arctic tundra. Ecological studies vol. 120, Springer
Verlag Berlin Heidleberg.
Wein, R.W. 1976. Frequency and characteristics of arctic tundra fires. Arctic, 29: 213-222.
Wein, R.W. 1971. Panel discussion: In: Slaughter, C.W., Barney, Richard J. and Hansen, G.M. (editors).
1971. Fire in the Northern Environment – A Symposium. Sponsors: Alaska Forest Fire Counc il and
Society of American Foresters. Held at: The University of Alaska, Fairbanks. April 13-14, 1971. Published
by: Pacific.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 149 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316300
Western North American Boreal Wet Black
Spruce-Tussock Woodland
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Date
3/11/2008
Modeler 1 Kori Blankenship
kblankenship@tnc.org
Modeler 2 Robert Lambrecht
Robert_Lambrecht@fws Reviewer Stuart Chapin
.gov
Lisa_Saperstein@fws.
gov
fffsc@uaf.edu
Reviewer
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Wetlands/Riparian
Dominant Species*
PIMA
BENA
LEPAD
VAUL
Reviewer Lisa Saperstein
General Model Sources
VAVI
ERVA4
CABI5
RUCH
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
Boreal Wet Black Spruce-Tussock Woodland is found throughout interior AK from the southern slopes of
the Brooks Range to southcentral AK (but not including the sub-boreal region) and west to the limit of
tree growth (NatureServe 2008).
Biophysical Site Description
This type is found on north-facing slopes, gentle hills, and inactive alluvial surfaces underlain by
permafrost (NatureServe 2008). Soils are poorly drained and consist of tussocks over peat or mineral soil
(Jorgenson et al. 2001, Boggs and Sturdy 2005).
Vegetation Description
Picea mariana is the dominant tree species and occurs in open stands. Tussock-forming sedges contribute
at least 25% of the vegetation cover (NatureServe 2008). Common understory shrubs include Betula nana
(including B. glandulosa), Ledum palustre ssp. decumbens., Vaccinium uliginosum and V. vitis-idaea.
Herbaceous species include Eriophorum vaginatum, Carex bigelowii and Rubus chaememorus
(NatureServe 2008). Mosses may be abundant and include Sphagnum spp. and Hylocomium splendens
(Jorgenson et al. 2001, Boggs and Sturdy 2005).
Disturbance Description
Fire is the primary disturbance in this system. Fire severity is generally sufficient to kill the overstory.
Mean fire return interval estimates in boreal Alaska range from 25-130yrs (Rowe et al.1974, Yarie 1983,
Heinselman 1978, Heinselman 1981, Viereck 1983, Viereck 1986).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 150 of 204
Under appropriate conditions, this system can originate from a very late seral stage of the Boreal Black
Spruce Dwarf-tree Peatland system.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This system tends to occur on a continuum between the Boreal Black Spruce Dwarf-tree Peatland system
and the Boreal Low Shrub-Tussock Tundra system. Boreal Wet Black Spruce-Tussock Woodland occurs
on sites that are slightly higher and drier than tussock-shrub sites and slightly lower and wetter than wet
black spruce sites.
The herb and shrub classes of this system are similar in structure and composition to the herb and shrub
classes of the Boreal Low Shrub-Tussock Tundra system, but the Boreal Low Shrub-Tussock Tundra
system occurs where site conditions prevent trees from invading.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch (small patch)
Issues/Problems
Comments
This model was based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Fairbanks (Nov. 07)
modeling meeting and refined by Robert Lambrecht. Torre Jorgenson provided some information on the
relationships between this system and adjacent systems.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
ERVA4
CABI5
RUCH
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-9yrs
This class is characterized by tussock forming sedges. Common species include Eriophorum vaginatum, Carex
bigelowii and Rubus chaememorus.
Succession to class B. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 151 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
20 %
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BENA
LEPAD
VAUL
VAVI
Shrub
Tree
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
10-49yrs
Shrubs resprout quickly after fire, becoming the dominant, upper-level canopy layer in 10-15yrs. Common
species include Betula nana, Ledum palustre ssp. decumbens., Vaccinium uliginosum and V. vitis-idaea.
Succession to class C. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
75 %
Late Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIMA
BENA
LEPAD
VAUL
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
50yrs+
This class is characterized by mature black spruce tussock forest (spruce cover generally 10-25%; tussock
cover >25%). Overstory is dominated by Picea mariana. It is during this class when organic material begins
to accumulate and a distinctive “active layer” appears, affecting fire behavior depending upon how dry it gets.
This class can persist in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 150yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI =
500yrs) will maintain this class.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 152 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
IV
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
152
667
0.00658
0.0015
124
0.00809
Percent of All Fires
81
19
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K. and Sturdy, M. 2005. Plant associations and post-fire vegetation succession in Yukon-Charley
Rivers National Preserve. Alaska Natural Heritage Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute,
University of Alaska Anchorage. Prepared For: National Park Service, Landcover Mapping Program,
National Park Service-Alaska Support Office, Anchorage, AK 99501.
Heinselman, M.L. 1978. Fire in wilderness ecosystems. In: J. C. Hendee, G. H. Stankey, and R. C. Lucas.
Wilderness Management. USDA Forest Service, Miscellaneous Publication 1365.
Heinselman, M.L. 1981. Fire and succession in the conifer forests of northern North America. In: West,
D.C., H.H. Shugart, and D.B. Botkin. Forest succession: concepts and application. Springer-Verlag, New
York. Chapter 23.
Jorgenson, M.T., J.E. Roth, M.D. Smith, S. Schlentner, W. Lentz and E.R. Pullman. 2001. An ecological
land survey for Fort Greely, Alaska. U.S. Army Cold Regions Research and Engineering Laboratory,
Hanover, NH. ERDC/CRREL TR-01-04. 85 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Rowe, J.S., J.L Bergsteinsson, G.A. Padbury and R. Hermesh. 1974. Fire Studies in the Mackenzie Valley.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 153 of 204
ALUR Report 73-74-61. Arctic Land Use Research Program, Department of Indian Affairs and Human
Development, Ottawa, Canada. 123 pp.
Viereck, L.A. 1983. The effects of fire in black spruce ecosystems of Alaska and northern Canada. In:
Wein, Ross W.; MacLean, David A., eds. The role of fire in northern circumpolar ecosystems. New York:
John Wiley & Sons Ltd.: 201-220. Chapter 11.
Viereck, L.A. Van Cleve, K. Dyrness, C.T. 1986. Forest Ecosystems in the Alaska Taiga. In: Van Cleve,
K., Chapin F.S. III, Flanagan, P.W. (and others), eds. Forest Ecosystems in the Alaskan taiga: a synthesis of
structure and function. New York: Springer-Verlag; 1986: 22-43.
Yarie J. 1983. Forest community classification of the Porcupine River drainage, interior Alaska, and its
application to forest management. USDA Forest Service GTR PNW-154.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 154 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316310
Western North American Boreal Alpine
Dwarf-Shrub Summit
This BPS is lumped with: see below
This BPS is split into multiple models: This BpS is lumped with: Western North American Boreal Alpine Dwarf-ShrubLichen Shrubland
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Kori Blankenship
Modeler 2 Tina Boucher
Modeler 3
kblankenship@tnc.org
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Reviewer
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Upland Shrubland
Dominant Species*
4/16/2008
Reviewer
Vegetation Type
DRYAS
VAUL
EMNI
VAVI
Date
General Model Sources
DILA
LOPR
SALIX
ARRU
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system is found in the alpine and subalpine areas of the boreal and sub-boreal regions in AK. To the
southwest, the range includes the Ahklun Mts and to the west it extends to the Nulato hills (Ecoregions 9
and 7, Nowacki et al. 2001).
Biophysical Site Description
These systems occur on exposed, windswept summits and ridges on alpine and subalpine sites. Soils are
thin, stony, and well drained to excessively well-drained. These sites typically do not accumulate much
winter snow (Viereck et al 1992).
Vegetation Description
Canopy cover can be sparse due to extreme exposure. Common shrubs include Dryas spp. (e.g. Dryas
integrifolia), Vaccinium uliginosum, Empetrum nigrum, Vaccinium vitis-idaea, Diapensia lapponica,
Loiseuria procumbens, dwarf Salix spp. (e.g. Salix arctica, S. rotundifolia and S. reticulata),
Arctostaphylos rubra and A. alpina. Exposed rock and lichens can be abundant. Common lichens include
Cladina rangiferina, C. stellaris, Cetraria cucullata, Stereocaulon spp., Alectoria nigricans and
Thamnolia vermiculata. Herbaceous species include Hierochloe alpina, Polygonum bistorta, Anemone
spp., Festuca spp. And Luzula spp. Mosses may be present but do not contribute much cover (Viereck et
al 1992).
Disturbance Description
Alpine shrub systems likely represent a relatively stable topopoedaphic climax, but little is known about
their successional dynamics (Viereck et al. 1992). Vegetation in these areas is controlled by wind
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 155 of 204
desiccation and a short growing season. There is little information about fire in this system. It is possible
that fires caused by lightning strikes could affect small patches of vegetation but likely would not spread
due to the sparse cover of fine fuel and barren areas acting as fire breaks.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Adjacent systems include Western North American Boreal Alpine Dwarf-Shrubland or barren alpine
classes (including talus and bedrock). Since this BpS is a combination of two systems, the identifying
criteria for both systems apply: identifiers for the Alpine Dwarf-Shrub-Lichen Shrubland system are
greater than 25% lichen cover and greater than 25% dwarf shrub cover, identifiers for the Alpine DwarfShrub Summit system are less than 25% vascular plant cover and abundant exposed rock.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Vegetation can be found in small or large patches. Fires are typically quite small and their spread is
inhibited by lack of fuel continuity.
Issues/Problems
Comments
This model was developed by Kori Blankenship in consultation with Tina Boucher.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
100 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
VAUL
EMNI
VAVI
DRYAS
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Height
Tree Size Class
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
Sparse, open or closed dwarf shrubs dominate. Exposed rock and lichens can be abundant. Commons species
listed in the vegetation description.
This BpS is relatively stable over time. Continual wind disturbance (probability = 1) maintains this BpS.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 156 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Shrub
Tree
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 157 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
NA
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Nowacki, G., P. Spencer, M. Fleming, T. Brock and T. Jorgenson. 2001. Unified ecoregions of Alaska. U.S.
Department of the Interior, U.S. Geological Survey. Open file-report 02-297. Two page map.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 158 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316330
Western North American Boreal Alpine Mesic
Herbaceous Meadow
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
Modeler 2 Colleen Ryan
Modeler 3
Upland Grassland/Herbaceous
Dominant Species*
4/24/2008
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Vegetation Type
General Model Sources
CABI5
BENA
ARAL2
EMNI
Date
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Map Zone
73
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs on gentle slopes in subalpine and lower alpine environments throughout boreal AK
(NatureServe 2008).
Biophysical Site Description
This system occurs on alpine and subalpine slopes. It tends to occur in small patches in a matrix with
dwarf or low shrub systems. Soils are moist to mesic.
Vegetation Description
Carex bigelowii is the dominant species. Other common species may include Luzula confusa and lichens.
Dwarf shrubs such as Arctostaphylos alpina, Empetrum nigrum, Salix pulchra and Betula nana are
usually present, but contribute to <25% of the canopy cover (NatureServe 2008, Boggs and Sturdy 2005).
Wetter sites may include more sedges and Salix spp. This system may form a mosaic with dwarf and low
shrub systems.
Disturbance Description
Little is known about the disturbance regime of this system. It tends to occur adjacent to low shrub and
alpine tundra systems, and even in a patchy mosaic with dwarf and low shrub systems. Because these
adjacent systems burn, it is likely that some fire will carry through the Alpine Mesic Herbaceous Meadow
system, especially in drier periods. Fire frequency is likely to depend on the adjacent vegetation. For this
model, the fire return interval was estimated at twice that of the adjacent Western North American Boreal
Mesic Scrub Birch-Willow Shrubland BpS.
Little is known about post-fire dynamics, but Carex bigelowii is expected to maintain its dominance.
Dwarf shrubs are likely to resprout or establish gradually over time, but will remain a minor component of
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 159 of 204
the system.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
There is no species overlap between boreal and Sub-boreal herbaceous alpine meadow types. Slope
position may also be different: Carex macrochaeta types usually occur just above subalpine alder on
straight or concave slopes.
This system often occurs in a patchy mosaic with low and dwarf shrub types (Betula nana and ericaceous
dwarf shrub types).
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Small to large patch
Issues/Problems
Comments
Because no data are available about the dynamics of this fairly minor system, this model was based on best
estimates, considering vegetation and site characteristics and the dynamics of adjacent vegetation types.
Page Spencer is a suggested reviewer for this system.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
100 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CABI5
BENA
ARAL2
EMNI
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
Alpine Herbaceous-Dwarf Shrub communities may include a diverse mix of species and species assemblages.
The class Indicator Species listed are not true indicators -- refer to the Vegetation Description for species
information.
No disturbances modeled.
Mesic herbaceous.
In interior AK, Carex bigelowii is the dominant species. Other herbaceous species, including Luzula confusa,
are frequently present, along with a well-developed lichen layer. Dwarf shrubs such as Arctostaphylos alpina,
Empetrum nigrum, and Betula nana are present, but contribute to <25% of the canopy cover (Boggs and
Sturdy 2005).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 160 of 204
Although this system tends to be fairly moist, litter accumulation will provide enough fuel to carry a fire
during dry periods. Because the most likely source of fire is the adjacent Boreal Low Shrub system, fire
frequency for this system was assigned to be 1/2 that of the Boreal Low Shrub BpS.
This BpS is relatively stable over time. Replacement MFRI = 400yrs.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Shrub
Tree
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 161 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
400
0.0025
400
0.00252
Percent of All Fires
99
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K. and Sturdy, M. 2005. Plant associations and post-fire vegetation succession in Yukon-Charley
Rivers National Preserve. Alaska Natural Heritage Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute,
University of Alaska Anchorage. Prepared For: National Park Service, Landcover Mapping Program,
National Park Service-Alaska Support Office, Anchorage, AK 99501.
Boggs, K., A. Garibaldi, J. Stevens, J. Grunblatt and T. Helt. 2001. Denali National Park and Preserve
Landcover mapping project. Volume 2: Landcover classes and plant associations. Alaska Natural Heritage
Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute, University of Alaska Anchorage, 707 A Street,
Anchorage, AK. 164 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 162 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316351
Western North American Boreal Alpine
Ericaceous Dwarf-Shrubland - Complex
This BPS is lumped with: see below
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Alpine Dryas Dwarf-Shrubland (BpS 1634)
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Kori Blankenship
Modeler 2 Tina Boucher
kblankenship@tnc.org
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Modeler 3
4/16/2008
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Upland Shrubland
Dominant Species*
CATE11
EMNI
VAUL
HAST3
Date
General Model Sources
ARCTO3
DRIN4
DROC
LEPAD
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This type occurs from subalpine to alpine locations in the boreal and sub-boreal regions of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This BpS is commonly found in alpine valleys and on sideslopes, low summits and ridges. Sites are welldrained and mesic to somewhat dry and are likely to retain late-lying snow.
Vegetation Description
This type eoncompasses a wide range of species and plant communities. Ericaceous or dryas (especially
Dryas integrifolia and/or Dryas octopetala) dwarf shrubs typically dominate. Total lichen cover is <25%
and may include Cetraria, Cladina, Cladonia and Stereocaulon. Common dwarf shrub include Cassiope
tetragona (more common north of the Alaska Range), Empetrum nigrum, Vaccinium uliginosum,
Harrimanella stellariana (more common south of the Alaska Range) and Arctostaphylos spp. Other
shrubs that may be common include Betula nana, Diapensia lapponica, Dryas octopetala, Ledum palustre
ssp. decumbens, Vaccinium vitis-idaea, Salix reticulata, S. phlebophylla, S. rotundifolia, S. arctica and
Oxytropis nigrescens. Common herbaceous species include Hierochloe alpine, Arnica lessingii, Carex
bigelowii, Carex microchaeta, Senecio lugens, Minuartia arctica, Anemone parviflora, Ligusticum
mutellinoides ssp. alpinum, Castilleja elegans, Poa arctica, Trisetum spicatum, Silene acaulis, Saxifraga
spp., Campanula lasiocarpa, Anemone parviflora, Senecio lugens and Polygonum bistorta. Mosses such
as Aulacomnium palustre, Hylocomium splendens, Pleurozium schreberi and Polytrichum and
Rhacomitrium spp. may be common. Cassiope and Harimanella tundra sites occur on terrain that is well
protected by snow in the winter, and often remains snow covered until the middle of the growing season
(Viereck et al. 1992).
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 163 of 204
Disturbance Description
Alpine shrub systems likely represent a relatively stable topopoedaphic climax, but little is known about
their successional dynamics (Viereck et al. 1992). Vegetation in these areas is controlled by the alpine
environment and short growing season. It is possible that fires caused by lightning strikes could affect
small patches of vegetation but little is known about the frequency, severity or seasonality of fires in this
BpS.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
This BpS is distinguished by <25% cover lichen and >20% cover dryas dwarf shrubs. Adjacent systems
include Western North American Boreal Alpine Dwarf-Shrub Summit, Western North American Boreal
Alpine Mesic Herbaceous Meadow, Alaska Sub-boreal and Maritime Alpine Mesic Herbaceous Meadow or
barren alpine classes (including talus or bedrock).
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch
Issues/Problems
This BpS represents two Ecological Systems (Dryas Dwarf-Shrubland and Alpine Ericaceous DwarfShrubland) and would be more appropriately named Alpine Dwarf Shrubland.
Comments
This model was created by Kori Blankenship in consultation with Tina Boucher.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
100 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CATE11
EMNI
VAUL
DRIN4
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
Open or closed dwarf ericaceous or dryas shrubs dominate. Common species are listed in the vegetation
description.
This BpS is relatively stable over time. Continual wind disturbance (probability = 1) maintains this BpS.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 164 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Shrub
Tree
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 165 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
NA
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K., A. Garibaldi, J. Stevens, J. Grunblatt and T. Helt. 2001. Denali National Park and Preserve
Landcover mapping project. Volume 2: Landcover classes and plant associations. Alaska Natural Heritage
Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute, University of Alaska Anchorage, 707 A Street,
Anchorage, AK. 164 pp.
Boggs, K. and Sturdy, M. 2005. Plant associations and post-fire vegetation succession in Yukon-Charley
Rivers National Preserve. Alaska Natural Heritage Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute,
University of Alaska Anchorage. Prepared For: National Park Service, Landcover Mapping Program,
National Park Service-Alaska Support Office, Anchorage, AK 99501.
DeVelice, R.L., Hubbard, C.J., Boggs, K. et al. 1999. Plant community types of the Chugach National
Forest. Tech. Publ. R10-TP-76. Juneau, AK: USDA Forest Service, Alaska Region. 375 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 166 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316371
Western North American Boreal Alpine
Floodplain - Lower Elevations
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Alpine Floodplain was split into a lower
elevations and an upper elevations BpS model. The lower elevation model applies
in the subalpine zone within the tall shrub zone. The upper elevations model
applies above the elevational limit of tall shrubs.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
Modeler 2 Kori Blankenship
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
kblankenship@tnc.org
4/15/2008
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Upland Shrubland
Dominant Species*
Date
General Model Sources
SAAL
SALIX
ALVIS
CHLA13
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
The BpS is found in alpine and subalpine areas in the boreal and boreal transition regions of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This system includes active and inactive alpine and subalpine floodplains of glacially and non-glacially
fed streams (NatureServe 2008). Soils develop on alluvium and are typically shallow and well-drained
(NatureServe 2008). This model applies to Alpine Floodplains that occur just above treeline, in the tall
shrub zone.
Vegetation Description
This system includes a range of floodplain vegetation including shrub (dwarf, low and tall), mesic
herbaceous meadow, early seral forbs and barren gravel. Common species include Salix alaxensis, other
Salix spp., Alnus viridis ssp. Sinuata, Betula nana, Chamerion latifolium, Lupinus spp. (L. nootkatnesis
and L. arcticus), Mertensia paniculata, Crepis spp (C. nana and C. elegans) Achillea millefolium spp.
Borealis, Erigeron acris and a variety of grasses (NatureServe 2008).
Disturbance Description
Frequent river channel migration and associated flooding and fluvial processes constitute the major
disturbances in this type (NatureServe 2008). The probability of flooding is assumed to be higher in alpine
floodplains compared with lower elevation floodplains because the alpine floodplains tend to have higher
gradients and the landscape absorbs less runoff due to steep slopes and typically coarse substrates. The
overall return interval for flooding in the alpine floodplain is estimated at about 20yrs, compared with 70*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 167 of 204
75yrs in the floodplain forest and shrub systems.
Alpine floodplains and riparian areas generally act as fire breaks.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Floodplain systems may occur in the active and inactive part of the riparian zone, but abandoned
floodplains are considered part of the adjacent upland. This model applies to the lower elevation variant of
this system, which typically occurs in the subalpine zone. Adjacent systems typically include Alaska SubBoreal Mesic Subalpine Alder Shrubland and Western North American Boreal Mesic Scrub Birch-Willow
Shrubland - Boreal, but may also include Western North American Boreal Alpine Dwarf-Shrubland or
Alaska Sub-boreal and Maritime Alpine Mesic Herbaceous Meadow, Talus and Bedrock.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Linear
Issues/Problems
The probability of flooding in the model is a best guess, not based on literature.
Comments
This model was developed based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Anchorage (Dec.
07) modeling meeting and refined by Tina Boucher and Kori Blankenship.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
40 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CHLA13
LUPIN
MEPA
CREL
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-14yrs
Although it is not modeled, because LANDFIRE does not map sparsely vegetated areas, this class should be
preceded by a sparse/gravel bar phase. This herbaceous class represents early seral vegetation that would come
in on gravel bars or other sparsely vegetated areas in the floodplain. Common species include Chamerion
latifolium, Lupinus spp. (L. nootkatnesis and L. arcticus), Mertensia paniculata, Crepis spp (C. nana and C.
elegans) Achillea millefolium spp. borealis, Erigeron acris and a variety of grasses. Vegetation cover is
generally open (10-50%) with large areas of exposed alluvium.
Deterministic succession to class B. Flooding (probability = 0.08), represented by Option 1 in the model,
resets the age of this class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 168 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
60 %
Late Development 1 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
SAAL
SALIX
ALVIS
BENA
Shrub
Tree
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
None
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
15yrs+
Willow and alder low and tall shrubs. Common shrub species may include Salix alaxensis and other Salix
spp., Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata and Betula nana.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Flooding (probability = 0.025), represented by Option 1 in
the model, causes a transition to class A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 169 of 204
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
NA
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) Flooding
Other (optional 2)
References
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 170 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316372
Western North American Boreal Alpine
Floodplain - Higher Elevations
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models: Western North American Boreal Alpine Floodplain was split into a lower
elevations and an upper elevations BpS model. The lower elevation model applies
in the subalpine zone within the tall shrub zone. The upper elevations model
applies above the elevational limit of tall shrubs.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
Modeler 2 Kori Blankenship
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
kblankenship@tnc.org
4/15/2008
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Modeler 3
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
Upland Shrubland
Dominant Species*
Date
General Model Sources
SAAL
SALIX
ALVIS
CHLA13
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
The BpS is found in alpine and subalpine areas in the boreal and boreal transition regions of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This system includes active and inactive alpine and subalpine floodplains of glacially and non-glacially
fed streams (NatureServe 2008). Soils develop on alluvium and are typically shallow and well-drained
(NatureServe 2008). This model applies to Alpine Floodplains that occur above the elevational limit of
tall shrubs.
Vegetation Description
This system includes a range of floodplain vegetation including shrub (dwarf, low and tall), mesic
herbaceous meadow, early seral forbs and barren gravel. Common species include Salix alaxensis, other
Salix spp., Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Betula nana, Chamerion latifolium, Lupinus spp. (L. nootkatnesis
and L. arcticus), Mertensia paniculata, Crepis spp (C. nana and C. elegans) Achillea millefolium spp.
borealis, Erigeron acris and a variety of grasses (NatureServe 2008).
Disturbance Description
Frequent river channel migration and associated flooding and fluvial processes constitute the major
disturbances in this type (NatureServe 2008). The probability of flooding is assumed to be higher in alpine
floodplains compared with lower elevation floodplains because the alpine floodplains tend to have higher
gradients and the landscape absorbs less runoff due to steep slopes and typically coarse substrates. The
overall return interval for flooding in the alpine floodplain is estimated at about 20yrs, compared with 70*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 171 of 204
75yrs in the floodplain forest and shrub systems.
Alpine floodplains and riparian areas generally act as fire breaks.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Floodplain systems may occur in the active and inactive part of the riparian zone, but abandoned
floodplains are considered part of the adjacent upland. This model applies to the variant of this system that
occurs above the elevational limit of tall shrubs. Adjacent systems may include Western North American
Boreal Alpine Dwarf-Shrubland, Western North American Boreal Alpine Mesic Herbaceous Meadow,
Alaska Sub-boreal and Maritime Alpine Mesic Herbaceous Meadow, Maritime High Alpine Herbaceous,
Talus and Bedrock.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Linear
Issues/Problems
The probability of flooding in the model is a best guess, not based on literature.
Comments
This model was developed based on input from the experts who attended the LANDFIRE Anchorage (Dec.
07) modeling meeting and refined by Tina Boucher and Kori Blankenship.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
35 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CHLA13
LUPIN
MEPA
CREL
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-14yrs
Although it is not modeled, because LANDFIRE does not map sparsely vegetated areas, this class should be
preceded by a sparse/gravel bar phase. This herbaceous class represents early seral vegetation that would come
in on gravel bars or other sparsely vegetated areas in the floodplain. Common species include Chamerion
latifolium, Lupinus spp. (L. nootkatnesis and L. arcticus), Mertensia paniculata, Crepis spp (C. nana and C.
elegans) Achillea millefolium spp. borealis, Erigeron acris and a variety of grasses. Vegetation cover is
generally open (10-50%) with large areas of exposed alluvium.
This class can succeed to a low shrub state (class B) or directly to a dwarf shrub state (class C).
Deterministic succession to class B. The alternate succession pathway to C (probability = 0.03) represents sites
that would not support low shrubs. Flooding (probability = 0.08), represented by Option 1 in the model, resets
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 172 of 204
the age of this class.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
20 %
Late Development 1 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
SAAL
SALIX
ALVIS
BENA
Shrub
Tree
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
15yrs+
Willow and alder low shrubs. Common shrub species may include Salix alaxensis and other Salix spp., Alnus
viridis ssp. sinuata and Betula nana.
This class may persist on some sites or may eventually transition to dwarf shrub (class C).
Alternate succession to class C occurs with a probability of 0.015. Flooding (probability = 0.03), represented
by Option 1 in the model, causes a transition to class A.
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
45 %
Late Development 2 All Structures
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
SALIX
SARE2
DRYAS
EMNI
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tree Size Class
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
15yrs+
On higher elevation alpine flood plains, dwarf shrubs may replace the early seral herbaceous stage.
Dominant shrubs may include one or more of the following : Salix spp., Salix reticulata, Dryas spp., or
Empetrum nigrum. Low willows can still be present, but cover is <25%.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Flooding (probability = 0.03), represented by Option 1 in
the model, causes a transition to class A.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 173 of 204
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
NA
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) Flooding
Other (optional 2)
References
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 174 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316420
Aleutian Kenai Birch-Cottonwood-Poplar
Forest
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Kori Blankenship
Modeler 2 Keith Boggs
Modeler 3
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Forest and Woodland
Dominant Species*
9/23/2008
kblankenship@tnc.org
ankwb@uaa.alaska.edu
Vegetation Type
BEPAK
BEPA
POBA2
POBAT
Date
General Model Sources
ALVIS
SABA3
RUSP
SARA2
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This BpS is commonly found on the eastern Alaska Peninsula and on Kodiak Island.
Biophysical Site Description
This BpS occurs at low elevations and also at the upper elevational limit of broad-leaved trees. At low
elevations it is found predominantly on well-drained, gentle lower hillslopes, large moraines and old
riparian terraces, although floodplain stands of cottonwood are not included in this system. In Katmai
National Park and Preserve it occurs between 19-286m elevation mostly on slopes and valley bottoms
(Boggs et al. 2003). When found on slopes this type is generally associated with shallow, stony soils that
overlay bedrock (Viereck et al. 1992; I.B.2.c).
Vegetation Description
Total hardwood tree species cover is >25% dominated by Betula papyrifera var. kenaica, Betula
papyrifera, Populus balsamifera ssp. trichocarpa or Populus balsamifera. Tree height ranges from 6-21m.
Understory shrubs include Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Salix barclayi, Rubus spectabilis and Sambucus
racemosa. Herbaceous species may also dominate the understory, such as Athyrium filix-femina,
Calamagrostis canadensis, Calamagrostis lapponica, Chamerion angustifolium ssp. angustifolium,
Equisetum spp., Gymnocarpium dryopteris and Heracleum maximum.
Disturbance Description
This system’s successional status is unclear. Viereck et al. (1992) suggest that some overmature
Southcentral Alaska Open Paper Birch Forest (I.B.2.a) may be “reverting to open shrub communities with
grassy openings (Neilenad and Viereck 1977 as cited in Viereck et al. 1992)." Also, the Open Balsam
Poplar (Black Cottonwood) Forest (I.B.2.c) type identified by Viereck et al. (1992) appears to be fairly
stable near tree-line. Possible disturbances include occasional fire, wind, disease and avalanches on steep
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 175 of 204
slopes.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
This type is not departed from its “Reference Condition.”
Scale Description
Small to large patch size.
Issues/Problems
Comments
This system was created for the Alaska Aleutians region and did not receive review for other regions in
the state.
This model was created by Kori Blankenship and Keith Boggs based on information from the draft
Aleutians Ecological Systems description (NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
100 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
BEPAK
BEPA
POBA2
POBAT
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Height
Tree Size Class
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Tree (> 3 m)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
This class represents the Aleutian Kenai Birch-Cottonwood-Poplar Forest. See Vegetation Description for
more information on species composition.
No disturbances modeled.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Shrub
Tree
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 176 of 204
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
NA
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Fire Intervals
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Mixed
Surface
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 177 of 204
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K., S.C. Klein, J. Grunblatt and B. Koltun. 2003. Landcover classes, ecoregions and plant
associations of Katmai National Park and Preserve. Alaska Natural Heritage Program, Environment and
Natural Resources Institute, University of Alaska Anchorage, 707 A Street, Anchorage, AK 99501. 274 pp.
Fleming, M.D., and P. Spencer. 2007. Kodiak Archipelago land cover classification users guide. SAIC at
USGS Alaska Science Center, Anchorage, AK. 77 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for the Alaska Aleutians Region.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 178 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316430
Alaskan Pacific Maritime Alpine Herbaceous
Dwarf Shrubland
This BPS is lumped with: see below
This BPS is split into multiple models: The Alpine Herbaceous Dwarf Shrubland BpS represents the following Ecological
Systems: Alaska Sub-boreal and Maritime Alpine Mesic Herbaceous Meadow,
Maritime Alpine Sparse Dwarf-Shrub, Maritime High Alpine Herbaceous. These
types may be distinct existing vegetation communities but little is known about
their successional relationships. Furthermore, these types may be difficult to map
separately because they occur either adjacent or in a mosaic with one another
and several of them are small patch systems. For these reasons, these types are
modeled as one BpS.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tom DeMeo
Modeler 2
Modeler 3
tdemeo@fs.fed.us
Upland Shrubland
Dominant Species*
7/30/2008
Reviewer Paul Hennon
Reviewer
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Vegetation Type
EMNI
PHAL4
HAST3
ARAR9
Date
General Model Sources
CAMA11
LUNO
VASI
GEER2
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
phennon@fs.fed.us
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This BpS is found from Prince William Sound south through southeast AK.
Biophysical Site Description
Alpine herb and shrub systems occur on a variety of sites in the subalpine and alpine zones. Much of the
alpine zone will be under snow for most of the year leading to a short growing season. Environmental
conditions are often harsh, particularly on exposed summits and ridge tops where vegetation may be
sparse with a high proportion of exposed rock or soil.
Vegetation Description
This BpS represents several existing vegetation types so species composition is highly variable.
Shrub species may include: Artemisia arctica, Cassiope mertensiana, Empetrum nigrum, Harrimanella
stelleriana, Luetkea pectinata, Loiseleuria procumbens, Phyllodoce aleutica, P. glanduliflora, Salix
arctica, S. reticulata, S. rotundifolia, Sibbaldia procumbens, Vaccinium uliginosum and Vaccinium vitisidaea.
Herbceous species may include: Aconitum delphiniifolium, Anemone narcissiflora, Astragalus alpinus,
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 179 of 204
Athyrium filix-femina, Carex macrochaeta, Castilleja unalaschcensis, Chamerion angustifolium,
Chamerion latifolium, Calamagrostis canadensis, Geranium erianthum, Lupinus nootkatensis, Minuartia
arctica, Nephrophyllidium crista-galli, Saxifraga bracteata, Saxifraga bronchialis, Silene acaulis,
Sanguisorba canadensis, Senecio triangularis, Valeriana sitchensis, Veratrum viride and Viola spp.
Disturbance Description
These communities tend to be quite stable over time. Soil disturbance, such as soil creep or freeze-thaw
cycles, is likely the main disturbance factor although snow avalanche is possible in some areas. Wind
plays a role in inhibiting vegetation growth on exposed summits and ridge tops. Reduced snow levels
could allow invasion of other plants and lead to succession to another system. This type is unlikely to carry
fire.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Issues/Problems
It is unclear whether there is a successional relationship between herbs and shrubs in some alpine types or
whether soil differences result in the prevalence of different life forms on different sites. Because of the
uncertainty, this system is represented by a single seral stage.
Comments
This system was created for the Alaska Maritime region and did not receive review for other regions in the
state.
This model was based on the draft Maritime Ecological Systems description (NatureServe 2008) with
input by Tom DeMeo. Review comments resulted in minor additions to the description.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
100 %
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
EMNI
PHAL4
CAMA11
LUNO
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Low Shrub (20 cm to 1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
None
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Herbaceous vegetation may also be dominant.
Description
Zero years plus
Alpine Herbaceous-Dwarf Shrub communities may include a diverse mix of species and species assemblages.
The Class Indicator Species listed are not true indicators -- refer to the Vegetation Description for species
information.
No disturbances modeled.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 180 of 204
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Shrub
Tree
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 181 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
NA
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 182 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316440
Alaskan Pacific Maritime Sitka Spruce Forest
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
Modeler 2 Kori Blankenship
Modeler 3
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
kblankenship@tnc.org
Reviewer
Reviewer
Map Zone
73
Forest and Woodland
PISI
OPHO
VAOV
SARA2
11/5/2008
Reviewer
Vegetation Type
Dominant Species*
Date
General Model Sources
ALVIS
RUSP
HYSP70
RHLO70
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system is found from south of Blying Sound on the Kenai Peninsula to Shuyak and Afognak Islands
and the northern tip of Kodiak Island from Viekoda Bay southeast to Narrow Cape. It is also present in a
narrow coastal band (likely one to several km wide) on the west side of Cook Inlet including portions of
Katmai and Lake Clark National Parks. The northern extent of Sitka spruce is near the Johnson River.
Biophysical Site Description
This BpS occurs in an area where the boreal and maritime regions of AK overlap. Sitka spruce occurs on
rolling bedrock hills and valleys where there is a strong maritime influence and warm, wet coastal storms
occur. Soils tend to be well-drained, deep and well-developed (except in areas where spruce is invading
meadows and shrublands).
The biophysical environment of the Kodiak Archipelago is unique in that vegetation communities on
these islands are still responding to the retreat of Pleistocene glaciers and ash deposition from the 1912
Katmai eruption (Fleming and Spencer 2007). Fleming and Spencer (2007, p. 5) note that: “Sitka spruce
forest is actively moving south along the island of Kodiak, perhaps as much as a mile/century [the source
of this claim is unknown (personal communication, Page Spencer)]. This succession replaces alder,
salmon and elderberry and forb meadows with dense spruce forest. Preferred wildlife habitats with
grasses, sedges and forbs and prolific berry crops are being replaced with dense conifers.”
Vegetation Description
Picea sitchensis is the dominant tree species and is stunted in some areas (especially on Shuyak and
Afognak Islands). Oplopanax horridus and mosses are common in the understory of open stands (Fleming
and Spencer 2007). Closed stands tend to have a very sparse understory that may include Oplopanax
horridus, Vaccinium ovalifolium, Sambucus racemosa, Alnus crispa ssp. sinuata, Rubus spectabilis and
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 183 of 204
feather mosses (e.g. Hylocomium splendens and Rhytidiadelphus loreus) (Fleming and Spencer 2007).
Calamagrostis canadensis and Menyanthes trifoliata are also present in some forest openings. In Lake
Clark National Park near the northern extent of this BpS, a broader range of species is present including
Picea glauca which may hybridize with Picea sitchensis. In this area, the characteristic moss understory
found in the Kodiak Archipelago is absent.
Disturbance Description
Primary succession of Picea sitchensis forest in the Kodiak Archipelago begins with rich forb meadows.
Overtime, Alnus crispa ssp. sinuata invades, fills in and Sambucus racemosa and Rubus spectabilis are
added to the species mix. Eventually Picea sitchensis will start to invade. The timing of the transition to
Picea sitchensis appears to be a function of the timing of the Pleistocene glacial retreat, seed source and
seed advancement. As the Picea sitchensis trees become denser, the first generation closed Picea sitchensis
forest develops with Vaccinium ovalifolium, Oplopanax horridus and feather mosses in the understory.
After about 150-300yrs the trees start to senesce, small scale blow down occurs and a multi-age stand
develops. In the forest gaps left after tree death or blowdown a rich shrub layer with Alnus crispa ssp.
sinuata, Oplopanax horridus and Calamagrostis canadensis competes with the young Picea sitchensis
trees. Over long time scales, these forests become more open. In areas with beaver activity, ponds can form
that when drained turn into muskegs which dry and can again support Picea sitchensis trees.
In the Katmai area Picea sitchensis advancement appears to be slower than on Kodiak (personal
communication, Page Spencer). It is unclear how well the Kodiak successional sequence applies to Picea
sitchensis forest on the south end of the Kenai Peninsula which appears to be better developed and is the
likely seed source for Picea sitchensis invading the Kodiak Archipelago.
Small scale wind events are the main disturbance affecting this system (larger areas of blowdown are
possible after logging). Bark beetle attacks have been recorded but their effects are minor and a few human
caused fires have been reported. Gap-phase dynamics drive the successional processes. As older trees
senesce or are windthrown gaps are created for younger trees to exploit and a multi-age stand develops.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Open Sitka spruce forests are often intermixed with alder and forb meadows (Fleming and Spencer 2007).
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Logging on Kodiak Island and on the Kenai Peninsula south of Seldovia has created more early
successional forests than would exist otherwise.
Scale Description
Matrix
Issues/Problems
This BpS is represented by a one-box model for several reasons:
1) Although Sitka spruce sites represent a unique biophysical environment with unique successional
dynamics it is difficult to model them using the LANDFIRE methodology which assumes that overtime
an equilibrium condition will be reached and that the percent of the landscape in each seral stage varies
within a certain range (i.e. the natural or historic range of variability). These modeling assumptions do
not apply to areas where spruce is actively invading.
2) In dense spruce forest where secondary succession characterized by gap dynamics has begun, the
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 184 of 204
disturbance is occurring on a fine scale as individual or small groups of trees die or are windthrown. The
small forest openings created by these dynamics are likely not mappable using the LANDFIRE
methodology and therefore seral stages can not be defined for me (for the LANDFIRE project seral stages
must be mappable).
3) It is unclear how well the dynamics described in the Disturbance Description for the Kodiak
Archipelago apply to the Kenai and west Cook Inlet parts of the distribution of this BpS.
Comments
This model description is largely based on work in the Kodiak Archipelago (Fleming and Spencer 2007)
and conversations with Page Spencer.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
100 %
Mid Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PISI
OPHO
VAOV
SARA2
Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower
Cover
Height
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Shrubs may dominate the early seral stages of
this BpS.
Description
Zero years plus
This class represents the Sitka Spruce Forest BpS. See the vegetation description for common species.
No disturbances were modeled.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Shrub
Tree
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 185 of 204
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
NA
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Fire Intervals
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Mixed
Surface
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 186 of 204
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs et al. in preparation. Kenai Fjords User’s Guide.
Fleming, M.D. and P. Spencer. 2007. Kodiak Archipelago land cover classification users guide. SAIC at
USGS Alaska Science Center, Anchorage, AK. 77 pp.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 187 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316450
Alaska Sub-boreal and Maritime Alpine
Mesic Herbaceous Meadow
This BPS is lumped with:
This BPS is split into multiple models:
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Tina Boucher
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
colleen_ryan@tnc.org
Modeler 2 Colleen Ryan
Modeler 3
Upland Grassland/Herbaceous
Dominant Species*
General Model Sources
LUNO
VEVI
ACDE2
ANNA
4/24/2008
Reviewer
Reviewer
Reviewer
Vegetation Type
CAMA11
GEER2
SACA14
VASI
Date
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Map Zone
73
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
Mountains in the sub-boreal region of AK.
Biophysical Site Description
This system occurs on alpine slopes above the tall shrub zone and below alpine dwarf shrub tundra
(NatureServe 2008). In the Kenai Mountains, it occurs on rugged mountains, dissected mountain side
slopes and ravines, on 45-55% slopes of all aspects and at elevations from 1950-2950ft (DeVelice et al.
1999). This system usually occurs on sites just above subalpine alder and below alpine dwarf shrub, most
commonly on straight or concave slopes (NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Description
This system is a very diverse assemblage of sedges and forbs.
Carex macrochaeta and Geranium erianthum are the most typical species. Other common species include
Sanguisorba stipulata, Valeriana sitchensis, Lupinus nootkatensis, Veratrum viride, Aconitum
delphiniifolium, Anemone narcissiflora, Polemonium acutiflorum, Epilobium angustifolium, Castilleja
unalaschensis, Artemesia arctica, Fritillaria Camschatcensis, Erigeron peregrinus, Anemone spp.,
Pedicularis spp., Saxifraga spp., Polygonum spp. and ferns (DeVelice et al. 1999, Viereck et al 1992).
Calamagrostis canadensis may be present, but is not dominant.
Disturbance Description
Fire is unlikely to be a significant disturbance for this system, due to moist soils, low fuel levels, and
adjacent vegetation types that rarely burn. Though this type may be found adjacent to the Western North
American Sub-boreal Mesic Bluejoint Meadow, it is probably less flammable.
Avalanches and snow slides are likely the most important disturbance, especially on steeper slopes. Spring
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 188 of 204
snow slides are the most likely to impact vegetation. While this system often occurs on steep slopes with
high avalanche frequency, it can also occur on shoulder slopes and near summits, where snowslides are
rare.
For this model, the mean return interval of snowslides was estimated at 20yrs (five times the return
interval of snowslides in the Alaska Sub-boreal Avalanche Slope Shrubland).
Grazing may be an influence on this system in some areas.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Adjacent systems include Western North American Sub-boreal Mesic Bluejoint Meadow and Western
North American Boreal Alpine Dwarf-Shrubland.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Scale Description
Large patch
Issues/Problems
Comments
Vegetation Classes
Class A
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
100 %
Early Development 1 All Structures
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Tree Size Class
None
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CAMA11
GEER2
SACA14
VASI
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Herbaceous
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Zero years plus
This stage is dominated by Carex macrochaeta with a variety of forbs.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Probability of avalanche = 0.05 (20yr return interval).
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Shrub
Tree
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 189 of 204
Description
Class C
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
0%
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
NA
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Fire Intervals
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
Percent of All Fires
Replacement
Mixed
Surface
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 190 of 204
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1) snow slides
Other (optional 2)
References
Boggs, K., A. Garibaldi, J. Stevens, J. Grunblatt and T. Helt. 2001. Denali National Park and Preserve
Landcover mapping project. Volume 2: Landcover classes and plant associations. Alaska Natural Heritage
Program, Environment and Natural Resources Institute, University of Alaska Anchorage, 707 A Street,
Anchorage, AK. 164 pp.
DeVelice, R.L., Hubbard, C.J., Boggs, K. et al. 1999. Plant community types of the Chugach National
Forest. Tech. Publ. R10-TP-76. Juneau, AK: USDA Forest Service, Alaska Region. 375 pp.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Viereck et al. 1992. The Alaska vegetation classification. Pacific Northwest Research Station, USDA Forest
Service, Portland, OR. Gen. Tech. Rep. PNW-GTR286. 278 pp.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 191 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316481
Alaskan Pacific Maritime Mountain Hemlock
Forest - Northern
This BPS is lumped with: see below
This BPS is split into multiple models: Alaskan Pacific Maritime Subalpine Mountain Hemlock Woodland (1649) is
lumped with Alaskan Pacific Maritime Mountain Hemlock Forest (1648). Alaskan
Pacific Maritime Mountain Hemlock Forest (1648) was then split into a northern
(16481) which includes fire disturbance and a southeast (16482) variant which
does not.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 John Morton
Modeler 2 Edward Berg
Modeler 3 Tina Boucher
Map Zone
73
Forest and Woodland
TSME
PISI
PILU
VAOV
11/5/2008
John_M_Morton@fws.g Reviewer Tom DeMeo
ov
Edward_Berg@fws.gov Reviewer Barbara Schrader
Reviewer
antvb@uaa.alaska.edu
Vegetation Type
Dominant Species*
Date
General Model Sources
ALVIS
MEFE
ELPY
NECR2
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
tdemeo@fs.fed.us
bschrader@fs.fed.us
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
This system occurs in the Kenai, Chugach, and St. Elias mountains in the subpolar rainforest region
(Alaback 1991, 1995). It occurs primarily in the maritime region, but also occurs in the sub-boreal
transition between coastal and boreal forests. It extends along the Gulf Coast of AK from Kenai Fjords to
Yakutat and possibly Glacier Bay and upper Lynn Canal. (North Pacific Mountain Hemlock Forest is
defined as occurring from Glacier Bay south).
Biophysical Site Description
Within the Kenai, Chugach, and St. Elias Mountains this system occurs on mountain side slopes,
shoulders, and bedrock outcrops from 0-1900ft (NatureServe 2008a). On the Chugach National Forest
mountain hemlock-sitka spruce associations are found at elevations up to 1200ft and mountain hemlock
associations are found several hundred feet higher (DeVelice 1999). Soils are typically shallow, welldrained and are derived from glacial and colluvial deposits as well as residual bedrock. Alaska Sub-boreal
Mountain Hemlock Forest is common on north-facing slopes, and also occurs on east and west aspects.
This system is uncommon on south-facing slopes (NatureServe 2008a).
Vegetation Description
Tsuga mertensiana may dominate or share dominance with Picea sitchensis or Tsuga heterophylla on
sites along the central Gulf Coast (Prince William Sound). Cupressus nootkatensis may be present in the
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 192 of 204
overstory in isolated locations in Prince William Sound. Picea glauca or Picea X Lutzii, may be present
on the inland (non-maritime) portion of the Kenai and Chugach Mountains, but have <15% canopy
cover. Betula papyrifera may be common in early seral stages in inland sites..
Common shrubs include Menziesia ferruginea, Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Vaccinium ovalifolium, V. vitisidaea, Oplopanax horridus, Cassiope stellariana, Rubus spectabilis, Elliotia pyroliflora and Empetrum
nigrum (NatureServe 2008a, NatureServe 2008b). Common herbaceous species include Cornus
canadensis, Rubus pedatus, Dryopteris expansa, Gymnocarpium dryopteris, Listera cordata, Tiarella
trifoliata and Streptopus amplexifolius (NatureServe 2008a, NatureServe 2008b). Common mosses
include Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium schreberi (NatureServe 2008). Sphagnum spp. may be
abundant on some sites. Plant communities in this system are described by DeVelice et al. (1999).
Picea sitchensis, Elliottia pyroliflorus and Nephrophyllidium crista-galli do not occur in the sub-boreal
portion of the region.
Disturbance Description
The major disturbance processes affecting this system include soil creep, wind, snow avalanche and fungal
pathogens such as red ring rot (Phellinus pini). Windthrow gap disturbances are important in both spruce
and hemlock recruitment in these forests (Potkin 1997). A moderate level of disturbance probably
maintains Picea sitchensis in the system.
Although lightning strikes and natural fires are rare in the maritime region, wildfires can play an
important role in disturbance regime of the Mountain Hemlock PNV (Potkin 1997) and other similar
temperate rainforest types (Agee 1993, Franklin and Hemstrom 1981) in areas where lightning strikes do
occur, such as the inland side of the Kenai and Chugach mountains and upper Lynn Canal. Radiocarbon
dates of five charcoal samples from soils at various locations in the Kenai Mountains ranged from 3010 to
570yrs before present with an average of 600yrs between dates (Potkin 1997). Charcoal has been reported
as present in most soil pits within the forest zone in the Kenai Mountains; this anecdotal evidence
suggests the occurrence of widespread, infrequent fires in this BpS (USDA Forest Service 2002).
Mountain hemlock, the climax species, is a fire “avoider”; the infrequent fires tend to be large and standreplacing (Agee 1993). In the Kenai Mountains fires travel from the valley bottom Lutz spruce stands, but
often stop at the lower boundary of mountain hemlock dominated forests (Potkin 1997).
Estimates of fire return intervals include:
570-3010yrs (600yr average) (Potkin 1997) (for Kenai Mountains);
1000yrs (personal communication, FRCC expert’s workshop, March 2004);
1500yrs+ (Lertzman and Krebs 1991) (Cascades and Olympic Mountains).
The infrequent fires in the subalpine hemlock forests tend to be large and stand-replacing (Agee 1993).
The extent of subalpine fires is partly a function of fire weather, but mainly depends on the distribution of
the subalpine forests, which is often patchy and grades into shrub, tundra, rock and ice (Agee 1992). In
the mountain hemlock zone in Washington State, fires have tended to be confined to individual slopes
(Agee and Smith 1984). In Oregon, historic fires >3200ha have been located; however, the majority of
stands found were patches of <500ha each (Dickman and Cook 1989). On the Kenai Peninsula, drought
weather conditions resulting from the 1912 Katmai eruption have been suggested to contribute to large
scale fires from 1913-1915, burning approximately 20,000ac on the Chugach National Forest (note that
this figure includes fire in all vegetation types present on the landscape). There is almost no lightning and
little human activity in the Prince William Sound area suggesting that fire is not an important factor in
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 193 of 204
this system (personal communication, Sue Kesti) for the entire area to which it applies.
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
The Martime and Sub-boreal Mountain Hemlock system typically occurs from sea level to treeline in
coastal environments; adjacent types include Maritime Sitka Spruce and Martime Western Hemlock. In
the sub-boreal region, it typically occurs in the elevation zone above the Sub-boreal White SpruceMountain Hemlock system.
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
As a result of climate warming, white spruce are now recruiting above mountain hemlock in the subboreal region of the Kenai Peninsula.
Scale Description
Matrix
Issues/Problems
Vegetation communities in the mountain hemlock BpS are stable over long periods and rarely disturbed;
therefore, secondary succession patterns are poorly understood (Viereck et al 1992). Fire is included in
the model but may not occur (or is extremely rare) in some areas to which this model applies.
Comments
This model was based on the FRCC Guidebook PNVG model for Kenai Mountain Hemlock (KMHM;
Murphy and Witten 2006) but the mid and late seral stages had to be collapsed so that LANDFIRE could
distinguish them for mapping. Ed Berg and John Morton helped to refine the model for the Kenai
Peninsula and Tina Boucher modified the description to include the rest of the range. Much of the
Disturbance Description was taken from the Kenai Mountain Hemlock (KMHM; Murphy and Witten
2006) description with some modifications.
Reviewers suggested that this northern Mt. Hemlock type could probably be combined with the southern
Mt. Hemlock type (North Pacific Mountain Hemlock Forest). This advice was followed for the Ecological
Systems classification but not for modeling purposes because the northern variant of the model includes
fire disturbance but the southern variant does not.
Vegetation Classes
Class A
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
VAOV
MEFE
RUSP
Upper
Upper
Upper
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Height
Tree Size Class
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-49yrs
This post-disturbance class is characterized by mesic herbaceous vegetation and tall shrubs. Herbaceous
species may start from seed immediately post-disturbance. Shrubs and tree seedlings become established; after
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 194 of 204
approximately 50yrs tree saplings attain the height of tall shrubs. Common shrubs include Menziesia
ferruginea, Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Vaccinium ovalifolium and Oplopanax horridus (NatureServe 2008a,
NatureServe 2008b).
Succession to class B. Alternate succession (probability = 0.005) causes a transition to class C.
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
60 %
Mid Development 1 Closed
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
TSME
PILU
MEFE
ALVIS
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
50yrs+
This class is characterized by closed spruce-hemlock or hemlock forest. Conifers share dominance with tall
shrubs in the early stages of this class. Between 170-200yrs conifers gain canopy dominance. Tsuga
mertensiana is the dominant tree with at least 15% cover.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 1250yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI =
5000yrs) causes a transition to class C. Wind/weather/stress (probability = 0.0002) maintains this class.
Class C
35 %
Mid Development 1 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
TSME
PILU
MEFE
ALVIS
Upper
Upper
Lower
Lower
Cover
Height
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Tree (> 3 m)
Med. 9–20" (swd)/11–20" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
50yrs+
This class is characterized by open spruce-hemlock or hemlock forest. Conifers share dominance with tall
shrubs in the early stages of this class. Between 170-200yrs conifers gain canopy dominance. Tsuga
mertensiana is the dominant tree with at least 15% cover.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 1250yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI =
5000yrs) maintains this class. Wind/weather/stress (probability = 0.0002) maintains this class.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 195 of 204
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
0 %
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Min
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
0%
Min
[Not Used] [Not Used]
Upper Layer Lifeform
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Max
Cover
Height
Tree Size Class
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
Disturbances
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
1430
5000
0.0007
0.0002
1111
0.00091
Percent of All Fires
77
22
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Agee, J. K. 1993. Fire Ecology of Pacific Northwest Forests. Island Press publishing. 493 pp.
Agee, J.K. and Smith, L. 1984. Subalpine tree establishment after fire in the Olympic
Mountains, Washington. Ecology 65: 810-19.
Alaback, P.B. 1991. Comparative ecology of temperate rainforests of the Americas along analogous climatic
gradients. Rev. Chil. Hist. Nat. 64: 399–412.
Alaback, P.B. 1995. Biodiversity patterns in relation to climate and a genetic base for the rainforests of the
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 196 of 204
west coast of North America. In R. Lawford, P.B. Alaback and E.R. Fuentes, eds. 1995. High Latitude Rain
Forests of the West Coast of the Americas: Climate, Hydrology, Ecology and Conservation. Berlin: SpringerVerlag.
DeVelice, R.L., Hubbard, C.J., Boggs, K. et al. 1999. Plant community types of the Chugach National
Forest. Tech. Publ. R10-TP-76. Juneau, AK: USDA Forest Service, Alaska Region. 375 pp.
Dickman, A. and Cook, S. 1989. Fire and fungus in mountain hemlock forest. Can. J. Bot.
67:2005-16.
Franklin, J.F. and Hemstrom, M.A. 1981. Aspects of succession in the coniferous forests of the Pacific
Northwest. In: West, D.C.; Shugart, H.H.; Botkin, D.B. Forest succession; concepts and application.
Springer-Verlag, NewYork.
Lertzman, K.P. and Krebs, C.J. 1991. Gap-phase structure of old-growth forest. Can. J. For. Res. 21: 173041.
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Kenai Mountain Hemlock. In Fire Regime Condition Class (FRCC)
Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
NatureServe. 2008a. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
NatureServe. 2008b. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for the Alaska Maritime Region.
Potkin, M. 1997. Fire history disturbance study of the Kenai Peninsula mountainous portion of the Chugach
National Forest. Draft. USDA Forest Service, Chugach National Forest. December 5, 1997. Anchorage, AK.
USDA Forest Service. 2002. Revised land and resource management plan, final
environmental impact statement. Alaska Region Chugach National Forest. R10-MB-480d, May 2002.
Viereck, L.A. 1979. Characteristics of treeline plant communities in Alaska. Holarctic Ecology. 2: 228-238.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 197 of 204
LANDFIRE Biophysical Setting Model
Biophysical Setting 7316790
Alaska Sub-boreal White Spruce-Hardwood
Forest
This BPS is lumped with: see below
This BPS is split into multiple models: Alaska Sub-boreal White-Lutz Spruce Forest & Woodland and Western North
American Boreal Mesic Birch-Aspen Forest (when it occurs in the AK sub-boreal
region) are lumped with Alaska Sub-boreal White Spruce-Hardwood Forest
because it is not clear that these types occur on different biophysical settings.
Although these types are mappable as separate existing vegetation types they
should be mapped as one BpS.
General Information
Contributors (also see the Comments field
Modeler 1 Karen Murphy
Modeler 2 Evie Witten
Modeler 3 Kori Blankenship
Map Zone
73
Forest and Woodland
PIGL
BEPA
POBA2
POTR5
2/10/2008
karen_a_murphy@fws.g Reviewer Rob DeVelice
ov
Reviewer
ewitten@tnc.org
Reviewer
kblankenship@tnc.org
Vegetation Type
Dominant Species*
Date
General Model Sources
MEFE
ALVIS
CACA4
OPHO
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
rdevelice@fs.fed.us
Model Zone
Alaska
California
Great Basin
Great Lakes
Northeast
Northern Plains
N-Cent.Rockies
Pacific Northwest
South Central
Southeast
S. Appalachians
Southwest
Geographic Range
These systems occur throughout the sub-boreal region of AK. The white spruce-hardwood forest type
occurs primarily on the west side of the Kenai Peninsula on the Kenai Lowland and also at lower
elevations in the northwestern Kenai Mountains.
Biophysical Site Description
These systems typically occur on well-drained upland terrain, including side slopes, toe slopes and
inactive terraces. Soils are generally developed on surficial deposits including glacial till, colluvium, and
loess. Within the Kenai Mountains, the Sub-boreal White Spruce-Hardwood system occurs at a lower
elevation zone than mountain hemlock-white spruce and mountain hemlock systems.
Vegetation Description
The dominant canopy species are Picea glauca or Picea X lutzii (the hybrid produced where the ranges of
P. sitchensis and P. glauca overlap) and Betula papyrifera. Other common canopy trees include Populus
balsamifera and P. tremuloides. Picea mariana may also be present. Salix scouleriana is locally common.
Common understory shrubs include Alnus viridis ssp. Sinuata, Viburnum edule, Rosa acicularis, Ribes
triste, Vaccinium vitis-idaea and Linnaea borealis. Menziesia ferruginea, Vaccinium ovalifolium and
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 198 of 204
Oplopanax horridus may also be common, especially in the spruce-dominated type.
Common herbaceous species include Calamagrostis canadensis, Chamerion angustifolium,
Gymnocarpium dryopteris, Cornus canadensis and, especially in the spruce-dominated type, Equisetum
arvense and Dryopteris expansa. Common mosses include Hylocomium splendens and Pleurozium
schreberi (DeVelice et al. 1999).
Disturbance Description
The major disturbance processes are fire, human disturbance, blowdown, insect infestations and (in the
Kenai Mountains) snow avalanches. Although lightning and natural fires have historically been
infrequent, wildfire plays an important role in the disturbance regime of this system (NatureServe 2008).
Under the natural fire regime, fires were infrequent, but large (USDA Forest Service 2002). Estimates of
the mean fire return interval range from 600-800yrs (Berg and Anderson 2006, Berg et al. 2004, Potkin
1997, personal communication FRCC experts’ workshop March 2004).
Spruce bark beetle (Dendroctonus rufipennis) infestations are a major natural disturbance of sub-boreal
spruce and spruce-hardwood forests. Spruce beetles typically attack larger, slow-growing spruce, but
infestations periodically escalate to epidemic levels when forest and climatic conditions are favorable for
beetle expansion (NatureServe 2008). During epidemic-level infestations, beetles are less selective and
may attack and kill a wider range of spruce trees. Beetle outbreaks that thin stands and produce a growth
release in surviving trees occur on average every 50yrs in white and Lutz spruce forests on the Kenai
Peninsula (Berg et al 2006). Spruce bark beetle outbreaks that produce a more substantial thinning occur
at longer intervals, with the last two severe infestations occurring in the 1870s-1880s and 1987 –present
(Berg et al 2006). The bark beetle outbreak that began in 1987 on the Kenai Peninsula has killed over 1.3
million acres of spruce (USDA Forest Service 2002). Berg (2004) found no association between spruce
bark beetle mortality and fire in the past.
When the canopy of these forests is thinned by heavy spruce bark beetle-mortality, bluejoint grass
(Calamagrostis canadensis) and fireweed (Epilobium angustifolium) tend to increase rapidly and dominate
the site for at least 10yrs (Holsten et al. 1995). Calamagrostis may proliferate rapidly from its predisturbance low level network of rhizomatous roots and may develop into a thick, seedling-excluding sod
within a few years (Berg et al 2006). Boucher (2003) found that rapid spread of Calamagrostis occurs
primarily on sites with deep, loamy soils. Thinning of the spruce canopy by beetle attacks also helps to
maintain hardwoods in the canopy over time.
Other natural disturbances include wind, avalanche and landslides. Windthrow gap disturbances are
important in both spruce and hemlock recruitment in these forests (Potkin 1997).
Post-fire regeneration of white spruce appears to be more successful when fires occur in mast years (Peters
et al. 2005). This interaction between fire, masting and subsequent tree regeneration could have
implications for historical stand structure and sucessional dynamics over time (Peters et al. 2005).
Adjacency or Identification Concerns
Native Uncharacteristic Conditions
Adapted from Murphy and Witten (2006): The present landscape of the western Kenai Peninsula reflects
human-caused fires that occurred over the last 100yrs, creating areas of early successional plant
communities, which include large stands of broadleaved forests (Potkin 1997). Over 99% of the fires
occurring on the Kenai Peninsula portion of the Chugach National Forest between 1914 and 1997 were
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 199 of 204
ignited by human actions (Potkin 1997). These human-caused fires have generally increased the richness
and patchiness of the vegetation at the landscape scale (USDA Forest Service 2002). The large number of
acres burned on the Kenai Peninsula during settlement caused conversion of some mature spruce stands to
grass, brush and broadleaf tree vegetation types. Prior to the settlement period of the late 1800s, the
majority of the age structures of the coniferous forest surveyed by Potkin (1997) were likely in the late
successional stages (Langille 1904 in Potkin 1997) and conifers were likely dominant.
Following spruce bark beetle outbreaks on the Kenai Peninsula grass and other fine vegetation increased
(Holsten et al 1995). Fire spreads rapidly through this type of vegetation; indeed the majority of fires (most
of which were human caused) on the Kenai Peninsula portion of the Chugach National Forest between
1914 and 1997 occurred in grassy vegetation (Potkin 1997). Standing and downed beetle killed trees
increase the amount of both fine, flashy fuel and heavy fuel. Spruce bark beetle outbreaks may be
increasing in frequency and severity in southcentral Alaska due to the warming climate. Berg et al. (2006)
found that recent outbreaks on the Kenai peninsula were positively associated with average summer
temperature in the preceding years. If this is true, current patterns of beetle attack and current fire regimes
are likely atypical of reference conditions for this type.
Scale Description
Matrix or large patch.
Issues/Problems
Comments
This model was based on the FRCC Guidebook Potential Natural Vegetation Group model for Coastal
Boreal Transition Forest (CBTF) (Murphy and Witten 2006). Disturbances with a probability of .0001 (i.e.
10,000yr return interval) were removed from the model because their effect is insignificant in a 1000yr
simulation. Class ages were adjusted slightly to make them line up along the main successional pathway,
and the relative age function was not used in any class except A to comply with LANDFIRE modeling
rules. These changes did not change the fire return intervals or the percent of the landscape in each class.
Because only minor changes were made to the CBTF VDDT model, its original authors are included as
contributors to this model, and Kori Blankenship's name was added. Much of the text in the General
Information section of this description was taken from the draft Boreal Ecological Systems legend
(NatureServe 2008).
Vegetation Classes
Class A
5%
Early Development 1 All Structures
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
CACA4
EQAR
CHAN9
MEFE
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Cover Open Shrub (25-74% shrub cover) Closed Shrub (> 75% shrub cover)
Height
Dwarf Shrub (< 20 cm)
Tall Shrub (>1.5 m)
Tree Size Class
Seedling/Sapling <5"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
Description
0-29yrs
Post disturbance regeneration: herbaceous to tall shrub-sapling. Following a moderate severity burn,
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 200 of 204
vegetative reproduction of shrubs and birch and aspen from shoots and suckers. Light-seeded herbs establish
where mineral soil is exposed. White and Lutz spruce seedlings are rare, but may be present if mineral soil
was exposed, seed trees remained after fire and they produced a good seed crop (Foote 1983). Following severe
fire on loamy soil, Calamagrostis may spread rapidly from rhizomes and capture a large percentage of the site
(Boucher 2003). Mosses and lichens exist but are not an important component. If Calamagrostis captures the
site, it may persist throughout this class but may become less dominant within 20yrs (Schulz 2000).
Common shrubs include Menziesia ferruginea, Alnus viridis ssp. sinuata, Vaccinium ovalifolium, Oplopanax
horridus, Vaccinium vitis-idaea and Linnaea borealis. Common herbaceous species include Calamagrostis
canadensis, Equisetum arvense, Dryopteris expansa and Gymnocarpium dryopteris.
Succession to class B. More open sites are represented by an alternate succession pathway to C (probability =
0.005)
Class B
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
10 %
Mid Development 1 Closed
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
BEPA
POBA2
POTR5
Shrub
Tree
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, presence of hardwoods
distinguishes class B from class E.
Description
30-129yrs
Closed conifer, hardwood, or mixed. Tree saplings gain canopy dominance over shrubs. Tree species may
include spruce, hardwoods or both. Rosa acicularis, Equisetum spp. and Linnaea borealis are commonly in
the understory. Mosses and lichens become established.
Succession to class E. Replacement MFRI = 1000yrs.
Class C
15 %
Mid Development 1 Open
Cover
Upper Layer Lifeform
Height
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
BEPA
POBA2
POTR5
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Min
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Dwarf Tree (< 3 m)
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Pole 5–9" (swd)/5–11" (hwd)
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, presence of hardwoods
distinguishes class C from D.
Description
30-129yrs
Open conifer, hardwood or mixed. Young trees become dominant in the overstory. Calamagrostis, if
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 201 of 204
dominant in class A, diminishes in importance. Rosa acicularis, Equisetum spp. and Linnea borealis are
commonly in the understory. Lichens and mosses become established.
Succession to class D. Replacement MFRI = 1000yrs.
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
Class D
65 %
Late Development 1 Open
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
BEPA
POBA2
POTR5
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Min
Woodland (10-24% tree cover)
Height
Tree Size Class
Tree (> 3 m)
Max
Open (25-59% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Large 20" – 40"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, absence of hardwoods
distinguishes class D from C.
Description
130-400yrs
Open conifer. Open spruce, hardwood or mixed stands with tree density < 60%. Hardwoods, if present and
mixed with spruce, lose dominance in overstory during this phase. Occasional hardwoods may remain. The
understory may include various combinations of tall shrubs, low shrubs, herbs, mosses and lichens.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 625yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 3333yrs)
causes a transition to C. Insects and disease can maintain this class (probability = 0.028) or cause a transition
to C (probability = 0.0015)
Class E
Structure Data (for upper layer lifeform)
5%
Min
Late Development 1 Closed
Upper Layer Lifeform
Herbaceous
Shrub
Tree
Cover
Indicator Species* and
Canopy Position
PIGL
BEPA
POBA2
POTR5
Upper
Upper
Upper
Upper
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Height
Tree Size Class
Max
Closed (60-100% tree cover)
Tree (> 3 m)
Large 20" – 40"
Upper layer lifeform differs from dominant lifeform.
For mapping, absence of hardwoods
distinguishes class E from B.
Description
130-400yrs
Closed conifer, hardwood or mixed. Site is dominated by mature conifers with > 60% canopy closure.
Hardwoods, if present and mixed with spruce, lose dominance in overstory during this phase. The understory
may include various combinations of tall shrubs, low shrubs, herbs, mosses and lichens.
This class persists in the absence of disturbance. Replacement MFRI = 606yrs. Mixed fire (MFRI = 2500yrs)
causes a transition to D. Insects and disease can maintain this class (probability = 0.012), cause a transition
to D (probability = 0.013) or cause a transition to C (probability = 0.0018).
Disturbances
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 202 of 204
Fire Regime Group**:
Fire Intervals
V
Replacement
Historical Fire Size (acres)
Mixed
Avg FI
Min FI
Max FI
Probability
715
5000
0.0014
0.0002
625
0.00161
Percent of All Fires
87
12
Surface
Avg 0
Min 0
Max 0
All Fires
Fire Intervals (FI):
Fire interval is expressed in years for each fire severity class and for all types of fire
combined (All Fires). Average FI is central tendency modeled. Minimum and
maximum show the relative range of fire intervals, if known. Probability is the inverse
of fire interval in years and is used in reference condition modeling. Percent of all
fires is the percent of all fires in that severity class.
Sources of Fire Regime Data
Literature
Local Data
Expert Estimate
Additional Disturbances Modeled
Insects/Disease
Wind/Weather/Stress
Native Grazing
Competition
Other (optional 1)
Other (optional 2)
References
Berg, E. 2004. White spruce fire history on the Kenai Peninsula, Alaska, based on radiocarbon-dated soil
charcoal. Unpublished manuscript. Kenai National Wildlife Refuge, Alaska.
Berg, E.E., J.D. Henry, C.L. Fastie, A.D. De Volder and S.M. Matsuoka. 2006. Spruce beetle outbreaks on
the Kenai Peninsula, Alaska, and Kluane National Park and Reserve, Yukon Territory: Relationship to
summer temperatures and regional differences in disturbance regimes. For. Ecol. Man. 227(3):219-232.
Berg, E. and R.S. Anderson. 2006. Fire history of white and Lutz spruce forests on the Kenai Peninsula,
Alaska, over the last two millennia as determined from soil charcoal. For. Ecol. Man 227: 275-283.
Boucher, T.V. 2003. Vegetation response to prescribed fire in the Kenai Mountains, Alaska. Res. Pap.
PNW-RP-554. Portland, OR: USDA Forest Service, Pacific Northwest Research Station. 59 pp.
DeVelice, R.L., Hubbard, C.J., Boggs, K. et al. 1999. Plant community types of the Chugach National
Forest. Tech. Publ. R10-TP-76. Juneau, AK: USDA Forest Service, Alaska Region. 375 pp.
Foote, J. M. 1983. Classification, description, and dynamics of plant communities after fire in the taiga of
interior Alaska. Res. Pap. PNW-307. Portland, OR. USDA Forest Service. Pacific Northwest Research
Station. 108 pp.
Holsten, E.H., R.A. Werner and R.L. DeVelice. 1995. Effects of spruce beetle (Coleoptera: Scolytidae)
outbreak and fire on Lutz spruce in Alaska. Environmental Entomology 24(6): 1539-1547.
Murphy, K.A. and E. Witten. 2006. Coastal Boreal Transition Forest. In Fire Regime Condition Class
(FRCC) Interagency Guidebook Reference Conditions. Available at www.frcc.gov.
NatureServe. 2008. International Ecological Classification Standard: Terrestrial Ecological Classifications.
Draft Ecological Systems Description for Alaska Boreal and Sub-boreal Regions.
Peters, V.S., S.E. Macdonald and M.R.T. Dale. 2005. The interaction between masting and fire is key to
white spruce regeneration. Ecology 86(7): 1744-1750.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 203 of 204
Potkin, M. 1997. Fire history disturbance study of the Kenai Peninsula mountainous portion of the Chugach
National Forest. Draft. USDA Forest Service, Chugach National Forest. December 5, 1997. Anchorage,
Alaska
Ritter, D. F. 1986. Process geomorphology. Wm. C. Brown Publishers, Dubuque, Iowa. 579 pp.
Rowe, J.S. 1972. Forest Regions of Canada. Canadian Forest Service, Department of Environment. Ottawa.
Inform. Can. Catalogue #FO 47-1300.
Rude, M. Kenai Peninsula Spruce Bark Beetle Mitigation Program, unpublished data
Schulz, B. 2000. Resurrection Creek Permanent Plots Revisited. USDA Forest Service, Forest Health
Protection, Alaska Region, Anchorage, AK. Technical report R10-TP-89. 14 pp.
USDA Forest Service. 2004. Forest insect and disease conditions in Alaska in 2003. U.S. For. Ser., For.
Pest Manage. Tech. Rep. R10-TP-123, Anchorage, Alaska.
USDA Forest Service. 2002. Final Environmental Impact Statement, Chugach National Forest
Land Management Plan Revision. Available at:
http://www.fs.fed.us/r10/chugach/forest_plan/feis_docs.html.
Van Hees, W.W.S. and F.R. Larson. 1991. Timberland resources of the Kenai Peninsula, Alaska, 1987.
U.S. For. Ser. Resour. Bull. PNW-RB-180. Portland, Oregon. 56 pp.
Werner, R.A., E.H. Holsten, S.M. Matsuoka and R.E. Burnside. 2006. Spruce beetles and forest ecosystems
in south-central Alaska: A review of 30 years of research. Forest Ecology and Management . 227(3):195206.
Yarie J. 1983. Forest community classification of the Porcupine River drainage, interior Alaska, and its
application to forest management. USDA Forest Service GTR PNW-154.
Yarie J. 1981. Forest fire cycles and life tables – a case study from interior Alaska. Can. J Forest Res.
11:554-562.
*Dominant Species are from the NRCS PLANTS database. To check a species code, please visit http://plants.usda.gov.
**Fire Regime Groups are: I: 0-35 year frequency, surface severity; II: 0-35 year frequency, replacement severity; III: 35-100+
year frequency, mixed severity; IV: 35-100+ year frequency, replacement severity; V: 200+ year frequency, replacement severity.
Sunday, November 22, 2009
Page 204 of 204